JP7586871B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a performance display.

In conventional gaming machines, when a jackpot is confirmed, a "BONUS confirmed" object is displayed as a sign, and an effect is applied to the "BONUS confirmed" object to make it stand out (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-76384 A

However, in Patent Document 1, the effect is simply displayed on the "BONUS confirmed" object, and there is a problem in that the displayed object cannot be made to stand out effectively.

The present invention was developed to address these issues, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can make objects stand out more effectively.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed ;
and a performance control means capable of executing a plurality of types of preview performances that predict the possibility of the advantageous state being attained, and capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including objects on the display means in accordance with the preview performances .
The performance control means includes:
After the variable display of the performance identification information is started, a first preview performance can be executed in a first situation before the performance identification information becomes a reach state;
After the variable display of the performance identification information is started, a second notice performance can be executed in a second situation after the performance identification information becomes a reach state;
The display means is
An object corresponding to a line of a character displayed in the first preview performance can be displayed,
The effect corresponding to the object in the first preview performance can be enlarged and displayed,
An object corresponding to the type of reach established in the second preview performance can be displayed,
The effect corresponding to the object in the second preview performance can be enlarged and displayed,
a period during which the object in the first preview performance and the effect corresponding to the object in the first preview performance are displayed without being superimposed is longer than a period during which the object in the first preview performance and the effect corresponding to the object in the first preview performance are displayed superimposed on each other;
a period during which the object in the second preview performance and the effect corresponding to the object in the second preview performance are displayed without being superimposed is longer than a period during which the object in the second preview performance and the effect corresponding to the object in the second preview performance are displayed superimposed on each other;
The effect corresponding to the object in the first preview performance is hidden before being enlarged and superimposed on the display area of the launch instruction object that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
An effect corresponding to an object in the second preview performance is displayed during a first period of the display period so as not to overlap with the display area of the launch instruction object, and during a second period after the first period has elapsed, is displayed so as to be enlarged and overlapped with the display area of the launch instruction object.
According to this, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying the display range of the effect for different types of objects with effects, a gaming machine can be provided which attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 61, Figure 64, Figure 66, Figure 95, Figure 96

The present invention may have only the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention as well as features other than the invention-specific features.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of display priority. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a deviation fluctuation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern type determination table. An explanatory diagram of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a data retention area for game control. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a performance control data storage area. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a jackpot. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. A flowchart showing an example of a performance processing during a jackpot. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the game state in which each performance can be executed and the effects that are displayed. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the game state in which each performance can be executed and the effects that are displayed. (A) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not to execute a hold display effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the determination ratio of the timing of change in the display mode of the hold display. An explanatory diagram of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the decorative pattern enlargement effect when the variable display starts. An explanatory diagram of the decision ratio for whether or not to execute a dialogue preview performance and the decision ratio for the dialogue to be displayed. 13A is an explanatory diagram of the pattern determination ratio of weak super reach title effects, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of the pattern determination ratio of strong super reach title effects. 13 is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in effect is executed and the effect pattern determination ratio. FIG. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when variable display begins. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the decorative pattern expansion presentation is executed when the variable display starts. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the expansion effect is executed when the pattern stops. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the expansion effect is executed when the pattern stops. A presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first line preview performance is executed. A presentation diagram showing the display mode when the second line preview performance is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed. A presentation diagram showing the display mode when pseudo consecutive performance is not being executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a normal reach presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the weak super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a weak super reach presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the advanced presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a strong super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a strong super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a cut-in effect is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a cut-in effect is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the deciding button presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the pattern matching performance is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the variable display result is a miss. A presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first line preview performance is executed. A presentation diagram showing the display mode when the second line preview performance is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a reach suggestion presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a strong super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a strong super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a cut-in effect is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the deciding button presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the pattern matching performance is executed. A presentation diagram showing the display mode when a fanfare performance is executed. A presentation diagram showing the display mode when a fanfare performance is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first right-hit display presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the V Challenge presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the V Challenge presentation and the V Challenge success presentation are executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the V winning presentation is executed. A presentation diagram showing the display mode when the ending presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first left-hit display presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the second left-hit display presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first prize ball number announcement presentation and the second prize ball announcement presentation are executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the hold consecutive suggestion presentation and the hold consecutive notification presentation are executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the hold consecutive suggestion presentation and the hold consecutive notification presentation are executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a demo presentation is being executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a demo presentation is being performed. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a decorative effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a decorative effect. FIG. 11 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where a magnification effect is displayed. FIG. 11 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where a magnification effect is displayed. FIG. 11 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where a magnification effect is displayed. FIG. 11 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where a magnification effect is displayed. FIG. 11 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where a magnification effect is displayed. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a super reach. This is a timing chart for the decorative pattern expansion performance when the variable display starts. 13 is a timing chart for the first line preview performance. 13 is a timing chart for the second line preview performance. This is a timing chart for the pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart for normal reach performance. This is a timing chart for the strong super reach title presentation. This is a timing chart for the strong super reach title presentation. This is a timing chart for the pattern matching performance. 13 is a timing chart for the preview button performance. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of each period in a timing chart. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of each period in a timing chart. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of each period in a timing chart. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the relationship between each period in a timing chart. A comparative diagram between the first line preview performance and the second line preview performance. This is a comparison diagram of strong super reach title presentation. A comparative diagram between the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of the variable display and the normal reach effect. A comparative diagram between the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of the variable display and the pattern matching effect. A comparison diagram between the expansion effect when the pattern stops and the normal reach effect. A comparison diagram between the expansion effect when the patterns stop and the pattern matching effect. A comparison diagram between normal reach effects and pattern matching effects. 13 is a timing chart of a normal reach presentation in a modified example. A presentation diagram showing the display mode of the second left-hit display presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of a jackpot type determination table and jackpot types in a modified example.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be operated;
In a second situation, the display size of an object corresponding to the second situation can be changed;
starting to display an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation at a timing related to completion of an action of the object in the first situation, and displaying the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation such that a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed superimposed on each other;
starting to display an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation at a timing associated with the display size of the object in the second situation becoming a specified size, and displaying the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation such that a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed superimposed on each other;
a length of a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner is different from a length of a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; furthermore, by displaying different types of objects accompanied by effects at multiple times, the opportunities for the player to pay attention to the presentation are increased; and furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 48, Figure 53, Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 59, Figure 112, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be operated;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to be operated;
An effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be displayed at a timing related to the completion of an action of the object in the first situation;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed at a timing related to the completion of the action of the object in the second situation;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a length of a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner is different from a length of a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; furthermore, by displaying different types of objects accompanied by effects at multiple times, the opportunities for the player to pay attention to the presentation are increased; and furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 48, Figure 53, Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 59, Figure 112, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means includes:
In a first situation, the display size of an object corresponding to the first situation can be changed;
In a second situation, the display size of an object corresponding to the second situation can be changed;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be displayed at a timing related to the display size of the object in the first situation becoming a specified size;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed at a timing related to the display size of the object in the second situation becoming a specified size;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a length of a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner is different from a length of a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; furthermore, by displaying different types of objects accompanied by effects at multiple times, the opportunities for the player to pay attention to the presentation are increased; and furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 48, Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 59, Figure 112, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound,
The display means, in a specific situation,
The object can be displayed as being in motion;
It is possible to display effects corresponding to objects,
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the specific situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the specific situation;
a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the specific situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of an effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be suitably highlighted; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the presentation effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 46, Fig. 48, Fig. 50, Head 54, Fig. 55, Fig. 59, Fig. 110, Fig. 112, Fig. 113, Fig. 114, Fig. 115, Fig. 116, Fig. 121

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the first effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the first effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, a third effect displayed together with the first effect or the second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object; and further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 121

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a timing at which the first effect is made invisible differs from a timing at which the third effect is made invisible;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a timing at which the second effect is made invisible is different from a timing at which the third effect is made invisible.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the third effect displayed together with the first or second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 121

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a timing at which the display of the first effect starts is different from a timing at which the display of the third effect starts;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a timing at which the second effect starts to be displayed and a timing at which the third effect starts to be displayed are different.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the third effect displayed together with the first or second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 121

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the first effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the first effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation,
The timing at which the display of the first effect starts is different from the timing at which the display of the third effect starts,
The timing at which the first effect is hidden is different from the timing at which the third effect is hidden,
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation,
The timing at which the second effect starts to be displayed is different from the timing at which the third effect starts to be displayed,
The timing at which the second effect is hidden is different from the timing at which the third effect is hidden.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the third effect displayed together with the first or second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 121

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including an object on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means, in a specific situation,
The object can be displayed as being in motion;
It is possible to display effects corresponding to objects,
a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
the performance control means causes the light-emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data for a first period during a display period of an effect corresponding to an object in the specific situation, and causes the light-emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data for a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; and further, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of an effect can be changed, thereby providing a gaming machine that enhances the presentation effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 109 to 117

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In the first situation,
An object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed so as to be operated;
An effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
An object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed so as to be operated;
An effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is a mode in which the object in the first situation is modeled in a first pattern;
the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is a mode in which the object in the second situation is modeled in a second pattern different from the first pattern;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by displaying different types of objects with effects at multiple times and varying the display pattern of the effects depending on the type of object, a gaming machine can be provided which attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 83, Figure 85

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means includes:
In the first situation,
An object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed;
An effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
An object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed;
An effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is made invisible before being enlarged and superimposed on the display area of the variable display information object showing the variable display situation;
the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is displayed so as not to overlap with a display area of the variably displayed information object during a first period of the display period, and is displayed so as to be enlarged and overlapped with the display area of the variably displayed information object during a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying the display range of the effect for different types of objects with effects, a gaming machine can be provided which attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 88, Figure 91

[Form 12]
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means includes:
In the first situation,
An object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed;
An effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
An object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed;
An effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
The effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is hidden before being enlarged and superimposed on the display area of the reserved information object corresponding to the number of reserved memories;
the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is displayed so as not to overlap with the display area of the pending information object during a first period of the display period, and is displayed so as to be enlarged and overlapped with the display area of the pending information object during a second period after the first period has elapsed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying the display range of the effect for different types of objects with effects, a gaming machine can be provided which attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 88, Figure 91

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In the first situation,
An object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed;
An effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
An object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed;
An effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
The effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is hidden before being enlarged and superimposed on a display area of a launch instruction object that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area;
the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is displayed during a first period of the display period so as not to overlap with a display area of the launch instruction object, and during a second period after the first period has elapsed, is displayed so as to be enlarged and overlapped with the display area of the launch instruction object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying the display range of the effect for different types of objects with effects, a gaming machine can be provided which attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 61, Figure 64, Figure 66, Figure 95, Figure 96

[Form 14]
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means includes:
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed for a predetermined period of time;
An effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
The object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period,
An effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to an object in the first situation imitating an object in the first situation, whereas an effect corresponding to an object in the second situation does not imitate an object in the second situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be suitably highlighted; furthermore, depending on the type of object for which the display period is set to differ, there are situations in which the effect is displayed to expand in a manner that imitates the object and situations in which it is not, thereby providing a gaming machine which suitably differs the degree of impression given to each type of object.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47

[Form 15]
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
In the first situation,
A first object corresponding to the first situation and composed of a predetermined number of single objects can be displayed;
The effect corresponding to the first object can be enlarged and displayed,
In the second situation,
a second object corresponding to the second situation, the second object being composed of a specific number of single objects that is greater than the predetermined number;
An effect corresponding to the second object can be displayed;
The first effect is an effect that imitates an object in the first situation, whereas the second effect is an effect that does not imitate an object in the second situation.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be suitably highlighted; furthermore, depending on the type of object set to have a different number of objects displayed, there are situations in which the effect is displayed to expand in a manner that imitates the object, and situations in which it is not, making it possible to provide a gadget that suitably differs the degree of impression given to each type of object.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47

[Form 16]
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
At a timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at a timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from that when the effect identification information is in the reach mode is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the start of variable display of the performance identification information and the display of the performance identification information in a reach mode can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by displaying it in an appropriate manner according to the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the performance identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 50, Figure 109, Figure 113

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
After variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined mode, an effect different from that when the effect identification information is in the reach mode is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode and in a specified mode can be suitably highlighted.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by displaying it in a suitable manner according to the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the performance identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 50, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
The effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, and then the effect identification information is displayed in a specific state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state.
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the specific mode, the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode is not displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode and in a specific mode can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the performance identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special state suggesting that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
The effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode are both modes imitating the effect identification information.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode or a special mode can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by displaying it in an appropriate manner according to the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode or special mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the performance identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 113, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
At a timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that suggests that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from that when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the start of variable display of the performance identification information and the display of the performance identification information in a special manner can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by displaying it in an appropriate manner according to the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a special manner to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the performance identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 59, Figure 109, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means includes:
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
After variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special state suggesting that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined manner, an effect different from that when the effect identification information is displayed in the special manner is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a special manner or in a predetermined manner can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; further, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by displaying it in an appropriate manner according to the situation; and further, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a special manner to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the performance identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 59, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Mode 22]
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a specific state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special state suggesting that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
When the effect identification information is displayed in the specific mode, the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode is not displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a special manner can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation; and further, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a special manner to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the performance identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 59, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Mode 23]
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound,
The display means is
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the first situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
In the third situation,
An object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed so as to be operated;
a fourth effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be displayed;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the third situation and the fourth effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the third situation and the fourth effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the third situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the fourth effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be suitably highlighted; further, a third effect displayed together with the first effect or the second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which a specific sound is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object and longer than the display period of the effect, thereby suitably enhancing the presentation effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 59, Figure 114 to Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including objects on the display means according to a performance situation, outputting a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound from the sound output means, and causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means, in a specific situation,
The object can be displayed as being in motion;
It is possible to display effects corresponding to objects,
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the specific situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the specific situation;
a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the specific situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of an effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation;
the performance control means causes the light-emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data for a first period during a display period of an effect corresponding to an object in the specific situation, and causes the light-emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data for a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be suitably highlighted; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, a specific sound is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object and longer than the display period of the effect, thereby suitably enhancing the presentation effect; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the impression of an effect is changed by switching brightness data during the display period of the effect, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 110, Figure 112, Figure 113, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound,
The display means includes:
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed for a predetermined period of time;
An effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
The object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period,
An effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed;
In the third situation,
An object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed so as to be operated;
An effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be enlarged and displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the third situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is an effect imitating the object in the first situation;
The effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is not an effect that imitates the object in the second situation,
the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation is an effect imitating the object in the third situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be suitably highlighted; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, depending on the type of object for which the display period is set to differ, there are situations in which the effect is displayed to expand in a manner that imitates the object and situations in which it is not, making it possible to differ the degree of impression given to various objects; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the presentation effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47, Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 110, Figure 111, Figure 113, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound,
The display means is
In the first situation,
A first object corresponding to the first situation and composed of a predetermined number of single objects can be displayed;
The effect corresponding to the first object can be enlarged and displayed,
In the second situation,
a second object corresponding to the second situation, the second object being composed of a specific number of single objects that is greater than the predetermined number;
An effect corresponding to the second object can be displayed;
In the third situation,
An object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed so as to be operated;
An effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be enlarged and displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the third situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation;
the first effect is an effect that imitates the first object,
The second effect is not in a manner imitating the second object,
the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation is an effect imitating the object in the third situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be suitably highlighted; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, the presentation effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object but longer than the display period of the effect; and further, by providing situations in which the effect is displayed in an enlarged manner to resemble the object and situations in which it is not, depending on the type of object that is set to have a different number of objects displayed, a gaming machine can be provided in which the degree of impression given to various objects is different.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47, Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 110, Figure 111, Figure 113, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Mode 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a predetermined sound,
The display means is
At a timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode is displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the predetermined sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the predetermined sound is longer than a display period of an effect corresponding to the performance identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the start of the variable display of the performance identification information and the display of the performance identification information in a reach mode can be suitably highlighted. Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility. Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information in a suitable manner according to the situation. Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the performance effect is suitably enhanced by a predetermined sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the performance identification information when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 50, Figure 109, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Mode 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a predetermined sound,
The display means includes:
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
After variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined manner, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach manner is displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the predetermined sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the predetermined sound is longer than a display period of an effect corresponding to the performance identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode and in a predetermined mode can be suitably highlighted; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by presenting it in a suitable manner according to the situation; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the performance effect is suitably enhanced by a predetermined sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the performance identification information when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 50, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Mode 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a predetermined sound,
The display means includes:
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
The effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, and then the effect identification information is displayed in a specific state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state.
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the performance identification information is displayed in the specific mode, an effect corresponding to the performance identification information when the performance identification information is displayed in the reach mode is not displayed,
the sound output means is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the predetermined sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the predetermined sound is longer than a display period of an effect corresponding to the performance identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode and in a specific mode can be suitably highlighted. Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility. Furthermore, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation, and a gaming machine can be provided in which the performance effect is suitably enhanced by a predetermined sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the performance identification information when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a predetermined sound,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special state suggesting that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
an effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode and an effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode are both modes imitating the effect identification information,
the sound output means is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the predetermined sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the predetermined sound is longer than a display period of an effect corresponding to the performance identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode and in a special mode can be suitably highlighted. Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode or special mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility. Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by presenting it in a suitable manner according to the situation. Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the performance effect is suitably enhanced by a predetermined sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the performance identification information when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 113, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Mode 31]
The gaming machine of embodiment 31 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound,
The display means includes:
At a timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that suggests that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode is displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting the specific sound when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the special manner;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the special mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the start of variable display of the performance identification information and the display of the performance identification information in a special mode can be suitably highlighted.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a special mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information in a suitable manner according to the situation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the performance effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the performance identification information when displayed in a special mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 59, Figure 109, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Mode 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound,
The display means includes:
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
After variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special state suggesting that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined manner, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special manner is displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting the specific sound when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the special manner;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the special mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a special mode and in a predetermined mode can be suitably highlighted; further, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a special mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by presenting it in a suitable manner according to the situation; and further, a gaming machine in which the performance effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the performance identification information when displayed in a special mode and longer than the display period of the effect can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 59, Figure 16, Figure 121

[Mode 33]
The gaming machine of embodiment 33 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A sound output means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including an object according to a performance situation, and for controlling the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a specific state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special state suggesting that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
When the effect identification information is displayed in the specific manner, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special manner is not displayed,
the sound output means is capable of outputting the specific sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of an effect corresponding to the performance identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a special mode can be suitably highlighted; further, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a special mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation; and further, a gaming machine in which the performance effect is suitably enhanced by a predetermined sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the performance identification information when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 16, Figure 50, Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 59, Figure 121

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including an object on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means is
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to be moved for a predetermined period in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
In the third situation,
An object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed so as to be operated;
a fourth effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be displayed;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the second effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the third situation and the fourth effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the third situation and the fourth effect are displayed in a superimposed manner;
the performance control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data for a first period during a display period of the fourth effect, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data for a second period after the first period has elapsed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, a third effect displayed together with the first effect or the second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the brightness data is switched during the display period of the effect to change the impression of an effect and enhance the presentation effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 50, Figure 59, Figures 113 to 116, Figure 121

[Mode 35]
The gaming machine of embodiment 35 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including an object on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means is
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed for a predetermined period of time;
An effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
The object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed for a specific period longer than a predetermined period,
An effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed;
In the third situation,
An object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed so as to be operated;
An effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be enlarged and displayed;
the performance control means causes the light-emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data for a first period during a display period of an effect corresponding to the object in the third situation, and causes the light-emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data for a second period after the first period has elapsed;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is an effect imitating the object in the first situation;
The effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is not an effect that imitates the object in the second situation,
the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation is an effect imitating the object in the third situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal way; further, by setting the display period of the effect, which is displayed so as to expand in a manner that imitates the object, to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of an effect can be changed to enhance the presentation effect; and further, by providing situations in which the effect is displayed so as to expand in a manner that imitates the object and situations in which it is not, depending on the type of object for which the display period is set to differ, a gaming machine can be provided in which the degree of impression given to various objects is varied.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47, Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 110, Figure 111, Figure 113, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Mode 36]
The gaming machine of embodiment 36 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including an object on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means is
In the first situation,
A first object corresponding to the first situation and composed of a predetermined number of single objects can be displayed;
a first effect corresponding to the first object can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
a second object corresponding to the second situation, the second object being composed of a specific number of single objects that is greater than the predetermined number;
A second effect corresponding to the second object can be displayed;
In the third situation,
An object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed so as to be operated;
An effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be enlarged and displayed;
the performance control means causes the light-emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data for a first period during a display period of an effect corresponding to the object in the third situation, and causes the light-emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data for a second period after the first period has elapsed;
the first effect is an effect that imitates the first object,
The second effect is not in a manner imitating the second object,
the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation is an effect imitating the object in the third situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect, which is displayed so as to expand in a manner that imitates the object, to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of an effect can be changed to enhance the presentation effect; and further, by providing situations in which the effect is displayed so as to expand in a manner that imitates the object and situations in which it is not displayed depending on the type of object, which is set to have a different number of objects displayed, a gaming machine can be provided in which the degree of impression of various objects is varied.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47, Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 110, Figure 111, Figure 113, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Mode 37]
The gaming machine of embodiment 37 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including an object on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means is
At a timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode is displayed;
the effect control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on predetermined luminance data for a first period during a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information indicating the reach mode, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the predetermined luminance data for a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the start of the variable display of the performance identification information and the display of the performance identification information in a reach mode can be suitably highlighted. Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility. Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information with a suitable presentation depending on the situation. Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the impression of an effect is changed by switching brightness data during the display period of the effect, thereby enhancing the performance effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 50, Figure 109, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Mode 38]
The gaming machine of embodiment 38 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including an object on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means includes:
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
After variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined manner, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach manner is displayed;
the effect control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on predetermined luminance data for a first period during a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the predetermined luminance data for a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode and in a specified mode can be suitably highlighted.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the performance identification information depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information with a suitable presentation depending on the situation.Furthermore, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of an effect can be changed, thereby providing a gaming machine with enhanced performance effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 50, Figure 121

[Mode 39]
The gaming machine of embodiment 39 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including an object on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
The effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, and then the effect identification information is displayed in a specific state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state.
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the performance identification information is displayed in the specific mode, an effect corresponding to the performance identification information when the performance identification information is displayed in the reach mode is not displayed,
the effect control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on predetermined luminance data for a first period during a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information indicating the reach mode, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the predetermined luminance data for a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the performance identification information is displayed in a reach mode and in a specific mode can be made to stand out in an ideal manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the performance identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the performance identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation; and further, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of an effect can be changed, thereby providing a gaming machine with enhanced performance effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 121

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including an object on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed.
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special state suggesting that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed in a superimposed manner;
The light emitting means is
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, light can be emitted based on special brightness data that is not related to the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become the reach state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, light can be emitted based on specific luminance data related to the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target performance identification information, the presence of the performance identification information itself is enhanced, and the performance identification information in a reach mode and in a special mode can be suitably highlighted.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the performance identification information, the performance identification information is made to stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.Furthermore, by illuminating the light-emitting means based on brightness data corresponding to the display status of the performance identification information, a gaming machine can be provided which draws attention to the performance identification information in a suitable manner.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 116, Figure 121, Figure 129

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means, in the advantageous state,
A first object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the launch of the game medium into the specific area in a manner different from that of the first object can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to instruct the firing of game media more appropriately by using an object that prompts the firing of game media into two types of specific areas with different display patterns.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 71, Figure 99

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means is
When the game medium enters a specific area in the game area in the normal state, a first object can be displayed to prompt the game medium to be launched into a predetermined area in the game area;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed to prompt firing toward the predetermined area,
The first object starts to be displayed without an effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect.
The second object is started to be displayed without any effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to instruct the firing of game media preferably by using an object that prompts the firing of game media into two types of predetermined areas with different display patterns depending on the situation.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 76, Figure 77, Figure 130

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A first object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
When the ball is not controlled to the advantageous state but is controlled to the normal state in the special state, a second object can be displayed to prompt the ball to be fired toward a predetermined area in the game area;
The first object starts to be displayed without an effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect.
The second object is started to be displayed without any effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by differentiating the display patterns of objects that prompt the launch of game media into a specific area and objects that prompt the launch of game media into a predetermined area, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of game media.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 71, Figure 76

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means is capable of executing a predetermined performance indicating an expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in a normal state,
The display means is
a first object that imitates the operation means can be displayed before the predetermined effect is executed;
A second object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47, Figure 56, Figure 57, Figure 71

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting an expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the special state,
The display means is
a first object that imitates the operation means can be displayed before the predetermined effect is executed;
A second object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 61, Figure 62, Figure 71

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means is capable of executing a specific performance that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in a normal state,
The display means includes:
A first object that imitates the operation means can be displayed before the specific effect is executed,
A second object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 58, Figure 71

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The performance control means is capable of executing a specific performance that notifies whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the special state,
The display means is
A first object that imitates the operation means can be displayed before the specific effect is executed,
A second object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 67, Figure 71

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a special effect that notifies the player that the advantageous state is controlled to the special state by using the operation means,
The display means is
A first object that imitates the operation means can be displayed before the special effect is executed,
A second object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 71, Figure 72, Figure 79

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of embodiment 49 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The display means is
After variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner to notify that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A predetermined object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
the predetermined object is started to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that when the performance identification information is displayed in the special mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that a favorable state is being controlled by a special type of presentation identification information that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area by a specified object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 59, Figure 71

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the special state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that notifies the player that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state;
A predetermined object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
The predetermined object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that when the performance identification information is displayed in a special mode.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that a favorable state is being controlled by a special type of presentation identification information that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area by a specified object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 68, Figure 71

[Mode 51]
The gaming machine of embodiment 51 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that notifies the player that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the special state, the effect identification information can be displayed in the special manner;
A predetermined object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the advantageous state can be displayed;
The effect identification information displayed in the special manner in the normal state is displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
The effect identification information displayed in the special manner in the special state is started to be displayed accompanied by an appearance effect, and is then displayed accompanied by a stay effect different from the appearance effect,
The predetermined object is started to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that when the performance identification information is displayed in the special manner in the normal state or the special state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that a favorable state is being controlled by a special type of presentation identification information that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area by a specified object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 59, Figure 68, Figure 71

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
When the display means is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information is started in a normal state,
A first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed,
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed.
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by a first object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and further, the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area can be suitably instructed by a second object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 69

[Mode 53]
The gaming machine of embodiment 53 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
When the display means is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information is started in the special state,
A first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed,
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed.
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object is displayed with a different stay effect than the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by a first object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains in the vicinity, and further, the second object having a different display pattern from the first object can suitably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 70

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means is
When the variable display of the performance identification information is started in the normal state and then the first advantageous state is entered,
A first object corresponding to the name of the first advantageous state can be displayed,
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed.
When the special state is controlled to a second advantageous state after the variable display of the effect identification information has started, a third object corresponding to the name of the second advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object is displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
The third object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object and the third object, which have different display patterns when they appear and when they dwell, can suitably indicate the type of advantageous state, and further, the second object, which has different display patterns when it appears and when it dwells, can suitably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 70

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of embodiment 55 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
When the display means is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information is started in a normal state,
A first object corresponding to a name of the special state can be displayed,
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed.
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can ideally indicate that play is possible in a special state, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can ideally instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 71, Figure 75

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of embodiment 56 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
When the display means is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information is started in the special state,
A first object corresponding to a name of the special state can be displayed,
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed.
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object is displayed with a different stay effect than the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can preferably indicate that it is possible to continue playing in a special state, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern from the first object, can preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 71, Figure 75

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that notifies the player that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state;
After displaying the performance identification information in the special manner,
A first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed,
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed.
a third object corresponding to the name of the special state can be displayed;
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object is started to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that when the performance identification information is displayed in a special manner or when the first object is displayed;
The third object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that the advantageous state is being controlled by the special type of presentation identification information, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and furthermore, it is possible to preferably indicate the type of advantageous state by the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, furthermore, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of gaming media into a specific area by the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and furthermore, it is possible to preferably indicate that playing in a special state is possible by the third object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 59, Figure 69, Figure 75

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of embodiment 58 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the special state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
A first object that prompts the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area in the special state can be displayed;
After displaying the performance identification information in the special manner,
A second object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed,
a third object corresponding to the name of the special state can be displayed;
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
the first object is displayed with a stay effect different from that when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode,
the second object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The third object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that the advantageous state is being controlled by the special mode of presentation identification information, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of the gaming medium into a specific area by a first object, which has different effects when the presentation identification information is displayed in a special mode and when it dwells, further, it is possible to preferably indicate the type of advantageous state by a second object, which has different display patterns when it appears and when it dwells, and further, it is possible to preferably indicate that playing in a special state is possible by a third object, which has different display patterns when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 68, Figure 70, Figure 75

[Mode 59]
The gaming machine of embodiment 59 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined effect suggesting an expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the normal state,
The display means is
a first object that imitates the operation means can be displayed before the predetermined effect is executed;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47, Figure 76

[Form 60]
The gaming machine of form 60 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The performance control means is capable of executing a specific performance that notifies whether or not the normal state is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means,
The display means includes:
A first object that imitates the operation means can be displayed before the specific effect is executed,
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 58, Figure 76

[Form 61]
The gaming machine of embodiment 61 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The performance control means is capable of executing a specific performance that notifies whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the special state,
The display means is
A first object that imitates the operation means can be displayed before the specific effect is executed,
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 67, Figure 76

[Form 62]
The gaming machine of embodiment 62 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a special effect that notifies the player that the advantageous state is controlled to the special state by using the operation means,
The display means is
a first object imitating the operation means can be displayed before the special effect is executed;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 76

[Form 63]
The gaming machine of embodiment 63 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling an advantageous state,
The display means is
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that notifies the player that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state;
When the ball is not controlled to the advantageous state but is controlled to the normal state in the special state, a predetermined object that prompts the ball to be fired to a predetermined area in the game area can be displayed.
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
the predetermined object is started to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that when the performance identification information is displayed in the special mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that a favorable state is being controlled by a special type of presentation identification information, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area by a second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding description: Figure 59, Figure 76

[Form 64]
The gaming machine of form 64 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means is
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state after the variable display of the effect identification information has started in the normal state, a first object corresponding to a name of the advantageous state can be displayed;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by a first object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and further, the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area can be suitably instructed by a second object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding description: Figure 69, Figure 76

[Form 65]
The gaming machine of embodiment 65 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means, in the special state,
When the advantageous state is entered after the variable display of the effect identification information is started, a first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed;
When the ball is not controlled to the advantageous state but is controlled to the normal state, a second object is displayed to prompt the ball to be fired toward a predetermined area in the game area.
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by a first object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells, and further, the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area can be suitably instructed by a second object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 70, Figure 76

[Form 66]
The gaming machine of embodiment 66 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means is
When the state is controlled to a first advantageous state after the variable display of the effect identification information has started in the normal state, a first object corresponding to the name of the first advantageous state can be displayed;
When the special state is controlled to a second advantageous state after the variable display of the effect identification information has started, a second object corresponding to the name of the second advantageous state can be displayed;
When the special state is not controlled to the second advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a third object can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area.
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
the second object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The third object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object or the second object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by the first object and the second object, which have different display patterns when they appear and when they dwell, and further, the launch of the gaming medium into a specified area can be suitably instructed by the third object, which has different display patterns when it appears and when it dwells.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 70, Figure 76

[Form 67]
The gaming machine of embodiment 67 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
In a normal state, the performance control means
A predetermined effect that suggests a degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed by using the operation means,
A specific effect can be executed by using the operation means to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
the display means is capable of displaying a predetermined object simulating the operation means at a first timing before the predetermined effect is executed and at a second timing before the specific effect is executed;
The predetermined object at the first timing is displayed with a first appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
The predetermined object at the second timing is displayed with a second appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the second appearance effect is longer than a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the first appearance effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the effects different when the object appears at the first timing and the second timing, it is possible to create a difference in the degree of impression given to the specified object, thereby increasing interest, and further, by standardizing the effects used when the object is in dwelling, it is possible to appropriately prompt the user to operate the operating means at either timing.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 56 to 58

[Form 68]
The gaming machine of embodiment 68 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The performance control means, in the special state,
A predetermined effect that suggests a degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed by using the operation means,
A specific effect can be executed by using the operation means to notify whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
the display means is capable of displaying a predetermined object simulating the operation means at a first timing before the predetermined effect is executed and at a second timing before the specific effect is executed;
The predetermined object at the first timing is displayed with a first appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
The predetermined object at the second timing is displayed with a second appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the second appearance effect is longer than a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the first appearance effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the effects different when the object appears at the first timing and the second timing, it is possible to create a difference in the degree of impression given to the specified object, thereby increasing interest, and further, by standardizing the effects used when the object is in dwelling, it is possible to appropriately prompt the user to operate the operating means at either timing.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 61, Fig. 62, Fig. 66, Fig. 67, Fig. 117, Fig. 121

[Form 69]
The gaming machine of embodiment 69 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The performance control means includes:
A first effect is executed in the normal state by using the operation means, the first effect indicating an expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state,
A second performance is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the normal state,
A third effect is executed in the special state by using the operation means, the third effect indicating the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state,
A fourth performance can be executed to notify whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means,
the display means is capable of displaying a predetermined object imitating the operation means at a first timing before the first performance is executed, a second timing before the second performance is executed, a third timing before the third performance is executed, and a fourth timing before the fourth performance is executed;
The predetermined object at the first timing is displayed with a first appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
The predetermined object at the second timing is displayed with a second appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
The predetermined object at the third timing is displayed with a first appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
The predetermined object at the fourth timing is displayed with a second appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the second appearance effect is longer than a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the first appearance effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the effect when a specific object appears depending on the timing, it is possible to create differences in the degree of impression made on the specific object, thereby increasing interest, and further, by standardizing the effect when the object is in dwell time, it is possible to appropriately encourage operation of the operating means at any time.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 56 to 58, 61, 62, 67, 117, and 121

[Form 70]
The gaming machine of embodiment 70 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means includes:
A predetermined effect can be executed during the period in which the variable display is being performed,
A demonstration performance can be executed during a period when the variable display is not being performed,
The display means includes:
When the predetermined effect is executed, a first object and a first effect corresponding to the first object can be displayed;
When the demonstration performance is executed, a second object and a second effect corresponding to the second object can be displayed;
A second object and a second effect cannot be displayed during an execution period of the predetermined performance, while a first object and a first effect can be displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that enhances the special feeling of the demonstration performance by using the second object and the second effect that are displayed only during the execution period of the demonstration performance, and allows the player to actively watch the demonstration performance.
Corresponding drawing: None (see variant 6)

[Form 71]
The gaming machine of form 71 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when a first start condition or a second start condition is satisfied;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which a variable display is not being performed,
The display means is
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed;
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a special variable display pattern having the largest number of types of notice objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to the control to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enhanced, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the special variable display pattern larger than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the special variable display pattern can be further enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 34, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 72]
The gaming machine of form 72 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when a first start condition or a second start condition is satisfied;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which a variable display is not being performed,
The display means is
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed;
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a special variable display pattern having the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to the control to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enhanced, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the special variable display pattern larger than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the special variable display pattern can be further enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 34, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 73]
The gaming machine of form 73 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when a first start condition or a second start condition is satisfied;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which a variable display is not being performed,
The display means is
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed;
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established;
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a special variable display pattern having the largest number of types of notice objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to the control to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a special variable display pattern having the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to the control to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enhanced, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the special variable display pattern or the special variable display pattern greater than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the special variable display pattern or the special variable display pattern can be further enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 34, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 74]
The gaming machine of form 74 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when a first start condition or a second start condition is satisfied;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which a variable display is not being performed,
The display means is
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed;
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a predetermined variable display pattern that has the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns that correspond to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enhanced, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the predetermined variable display pattern larger than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the predetermined variable display pattern can be suitably enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 32, 33, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 75]
The gaming machine of form 75 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when a first start condition or a second start condition is satisfied;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which a variable display is not being performed,
The display means is
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed;
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a specific variable display pattern having the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enhanced, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern larger than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern can be suitably enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 32, 33, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 76]
The gaming machine of form 76 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when a first start condition or a second start condition is satisfied;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which a variable display is not being performed,
The display means is
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed;
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established;
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a predetermined variable display pattern in which the number of types of notice objects is the largest among the variable display patterns corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration presentation;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a specific variable display pattern having the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enhanced, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the predetermined variable display pattern or the specific variable display pattern greater than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the predetermined variable display pattern or the specific variable display pattern can be further enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 32, 33, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 77]
The gaming machine of form 77 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for starting a variable display based on the establishment of a first start condition or a second start condition;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling the game to a first advantageous state or a second advantageous state after the variable display that has started based on the establishment of the first start condition ends,
The performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which a variable display is not being performed,
The display means is
In the first advantageous state, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
In the second advantageous state, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the control period of the first advantageous state is greater than the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the execution period of the demonstration performance;
The number of types of effects that the display means can display during the control period of the second advantageous state is greater than the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the execution period of the demonstration performance.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying multiple effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be favorably enhanced, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state greater than during the demonstration performance, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be favorably enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 25, Figure 36, Figure 81, Figure 82

[Form 78]
The gaming machine of form 78 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for starting a variable display based on the establishment of a first start condition or a second start condition;
A performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation,
The game control means is capable of controlling the game to a first advantageous state or a second advantageous state after the variable display that has started based on the establishment of the second start condition ends,
The performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which a variable display is not being performed,
The display means includes:
In the first advantageous state, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
In the second advantageous state, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the control period of the first advantageous state is greater than the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the execution period of the demonstration performance;
The number of types of effects that the display means can display during the control period of the second advantageous state is greater than the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the execution period of the demonstration performance.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying multiple effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be favorably enhanced, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state greater than during the demonstration performance, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be favorably enhanced.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 131, Variation 7

The following describes the embodiment of the present invention.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided at the top left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-hit notification image that encourages the player to perform a right-hit operation, the time-saving remaining display that indicates the number of times the time-saving function is remaining, etc. may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer) the presentation images (object images) such as characters to prevent the presentation images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbol, and the error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer) the presentation images to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the presentation images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. The reserved displays and active displays are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern reserved memory display area in which a first reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern reserved memory display area in which a second reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a reserved display corresponding to the first special pattern when the game state is in a normal state, and is a display area that displays a reserved display corresponding to the second special pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can be changed between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a first special variable winning ball device 7A and a second special variable winning ball device 7B are provided, each having a large winning opening. The first special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and forms a first large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. The second special variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 2), and forms a second large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

In the first special variable winning ball device 7A, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the first large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the first large prize opening. On the other hand, in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the first large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the first large prize opening.

Similarly, in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 83 for the large winning opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the second large winning opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the second large winning opening. On the other hand, in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 83 for the large winning opening door is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the second large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the second large winning opening.

A game ball that enters the first large prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23 (see FIG. 2), and a game ball that enters the second large prize opening is detected by the second count switch 24 (see FIG. 2). When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23 or the second count switch 24, that is, when a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

The game area in this embodiment is composed of a left game area 2L, which is an area formed to the left of the image display device 5, where game balls can flow down and enter the general winning opening 10 and the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a right game area 2R, which is an area formed to the right of the image display device 5, where game balls can flow down and enter the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the first and second large winning openings formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can pass through the passing gate 41.

In this embodiment, the normal state is a state in which the player mainly shoots game balls toward the left game area 2L, and the time-saving state, special probability state, and jackpot game state are states in which the player shoots game balls toward the right game area 2R.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also called "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are composed of LEDs. The various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the first and second large prize openings formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 are opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize openings can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize openings are open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 times, 6 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

In this embodiment, the large prize opening that opens in a specific round (e.g., the sixth round) differs depending on the type of jackpot, and in the case of a jackpot type in which the second prize opening opens in the specific round, the game ball enters the second large prize opening, that is, the game state is controlled to a high probability high base state after the jackpot game ends based on the detection by the second count switch 24.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), first count switch 23, and second count switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81, solenoids 82, and 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoids 82 and 83 for the large prize opening door.

The pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is also provided with a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is connected to a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to a player based on receiving a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor that is provided in a payout passage through which the game balls paid out by the payout device pass, and it is possible to stop driving the payout device depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor.

The payout control board is also connected to a handle sensor for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board controls a launching device capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether or not the touch ring has been detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device are also input from the payout control board to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, so the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image drawing area, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image drawing area, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 4, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as an image of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as an image of layer 2, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as an image of layer 3, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an enlarged effect image as an image of layer 4, a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative effect image as an image of layer 5, a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a precursor image of a crack (such as a glass plate image) as an image of layer 6, a glass plate image A as an image to be broken that is displayed in place of the glass plate image, and a layer 7 image showing a warning that the glass plate image A has been broken. a Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and placing the fragment images resulting from this, a Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and placing the action effect image described later as the Layer 8 image, a Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and placing the whiteout image 003SG303 described later as the Layer 9 image, a Layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and placing the operation prompt image described later as the Layer 10 image, a Layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and placing the variable display compatible display (pending display and active display) as the Layer 11 image, a Layer 12 image drawing area for drawing and placing the right-hit display and left-hit display images described later as the Layer 12 image, and a Layer 13 image drawing area for drawing and placing the small pattern (fourth pattern) as the Layer 13 image.

The enlargement effect in this embodiment is an image that imitates (is similar to) the target image in each performance and is enlarged over time, has a higher transparency than the target image, and the transparency gradually increases as the image is enlarged (see Figures 83 to 97). The decorative effect in this embodiment is an image that is different in shape from the target image in each performance and has the same transparency (0% transparency) as the target image at least at the start of display (see Figures 98 and 99). In addition, the development cost of the enlargement effect is lower than that of the decorative effect. Specifically, the decorative effect requires preparation of dedicated material data and then processing the material data appropriately, so it takes a certain amount of time to create the image, whereas the enlargement effect can be created by reusing the material data of the decorative pattern, so it can be created in a short period of time. In other words, the enlargement effect is an image that can effectively highlight the target image to be noticed while requiring low development costs.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in these layer 1 image drawing area to layer 13 image drawing area. Also, as shown in Figures 4 and 5, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the lowest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area. images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 12 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 13 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 12 image drawing area.

That is, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image displayed at the lowest level in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area in the image display device 5. an image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image displayed (priority displayed) above an image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area in the image display device 5, an image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is an image displayed (priority displayed) above an image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area in the image display device 5, an image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is an image displayed (priority displayed) above an image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5, an image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is an image displayed (priority displayed) above an image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area in the image display device 5, an image drawn in the layer 12 image drawing area is an image displayed (priority displayed) above an image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and an image drawn in the layer 13 image drawing area is an image displayed at the topmost layer in the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 6 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 6(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 6(B), the variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change of the decorative pattern in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, probability variable state). Furthermore, the high probability, high base state may simply be called the "high probability state."

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port winning designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A that has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port winning designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B that has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B. Command B300H is a large prize opening entry designation command that notifies the player that 15 prize balls will be paid out based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first or second large prize opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 is detected by the first or second count switch 23 or 24, resulting in a winning entry.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, and the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden jackpot). Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the random number value used to judge the variation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other (normal reach)".

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command D000H is a V entry notification command for notifying that a game ball has entered the second large entry port during a jackpot game, that is, that a game ball has been detected by the second count switch 24. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the detection of a game ball by the second count switch 24 during a jackpot game may be referred to as a "V entry." In this embodiment, "V entry" refers to the execution of both time-saving control and probability variable control in the high base state after the end of the jackpot game in which the entry occurred (being controlled to a high probability high base state).

Command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration display specification command to specify the execution of a customer waiting demonstration display (customer waiting demonstration).

The commands shown in FIG. 6(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 7, on the main board 11 side, the following numerical data are controlled to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, random number value MR5 for determining the normal chart display result, and random number value MR6 for determining the initial value of random number value MR5. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR6. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR6 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result of a special symbol or other such in a special symbol game to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "jackpot A", "jackpot B", or "jackpot C" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "99", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the type of variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns as either "non-reach," "normal reach," or "super reach," and can take a value in the range of "0" to "4095," for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "255", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

The random number value MR6 for determining the MR initial value is a random number value used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR5, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 8 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

9(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 9(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for up to 100 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special variable control is executed for up to 100 variable displays after the jackpot game ends when the game ball enters the second large prize slot (so-called V prize) in the sixth round of the jackpot game state.

The jackpot game state by "jackpot A" is a jackpot game state (6 rounds and jackpot that cannot win a V) in which the first large prize entry port is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first to sixth rounds, and six rounds are repeated. The jackpot game state by "jackpot B" is a jackpot game state (6 lands and jackpot that can win a V) in which the first large prize entry port is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first to fifth rounds, while the second large prize entry port is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the sixth round. The jackpot game state by "jackpot C" is a jackpot game state (10 lands and jackpot that can win a V) in which the first large prize entry port is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first to fifth rounds and the seventh to tenth rounds, while the second large prize entry port is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the sixth round.

In this embodiment, at least the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, so if a jackpot occurs while the time-saving control is being executed, the time-saving control (and the special probability control) is executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which jackpot gaming states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9(A), in the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "jackpot A," "jackpot B," and "jackpot C" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "0" to "49") are assigned to the jackpot types "jackpot A" and "jackpot B," which have fewer rounds, while when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "jackpot A" and "jackpot B." With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types in the special chart game using the first special chart by the first special chart display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types in the special chart game using the second special chart by the second special chart display device 4B. In particular, in the special chart game using the second special chart, the jackpot type is not determined to be "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" and controlled to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control associated with the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figures 10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation patterns in this embodiment. The fluctuation patterns in this embodiment are roughly divided into a miss fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a miss and a jackpot fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10, the miss fluctuation patterns can be broadly categorized into non-reach miss fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: non-reach fluctuation pattern) in which no reach performance is executed and a miss occurs, normal reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: normal reach fluctuation pattern) in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a miss occurs, low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern) in which a low base weak super reach A reach performance or a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed in a normal state (low base state) and a miss occurs, and low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern) in which a low base weak super reach A reach performance or a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed in a normal state (low base state), and low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern) in which a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed and a miss occurs, and low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern) in which a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed in a normal state (low base state), ... The fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach A (fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A fluctuation pattern) in a normal state (low base state) where the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is finally executed and a miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach B (fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B fluctuation pattern) in a normal state (low base state) where the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is finally executed and a miss occurs, and the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach C (fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern) in a normal state (low base state) where the reach performance of low base strong super reach C is finally executed and a miss occurs. fluctuation pattern of base strong super reach C), fluctuation pattern of low base strongest super reach in normal state (low base state) where the reach performance of low base strongest super reach is finally executed and it is a miss (fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern), fluctuation pattern of high base super reach A in time-saving state or probability variable state (high base state) where the reach performance of high base super reach A is finally executed and it is a miss (fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A fluctuation pattern), fluctuation pattern of high base super reach B in time-saving state or probability variable state (high base state) where the reach performance of high base super reach B is finally executed There are fluctuation patterns for high base super reach B (fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B fluctuation pattern) in which the reach performance of high base super reach C is finally executed and a miss in the time-saving state or the probability hit state (high base state) (fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C fluctuation pattern), and fluctuation patterns for high base super reach D (fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D fluctuation pattern) in which the reach performance of high base super reach D is finally executed and a miss in the time-saving state or the probability hit state (high base state).

The four types of non-reach fluctuation patterns are PA1-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 12000 ms and no reach performance is executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is two or less in the normal state; PA1-2, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 5000 ms and no reach performance is executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is three in the normal state; PA1-3, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 2000 ms and no reach performance is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state or special probability state); and PA1-4, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 8000 ms and no reach performance is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state or special probability state).

For the normal reach type of fluctuation pattern, there are three types of fluctuation patterns: PA2-1A, where the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach reach performance is executed and results in a miss; PA2-1B, where the special chart fluctuation time is 35,000 ms and the normal reach reach performance is executed and results in a miss after one pseudo consecutive performance; and PA2-1C, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice and then the normal reach reach performance is executed and results in a miss.

The low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern type has two types of fluctuation patterns: PA2-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, resulting in a miss; and PA2-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are executed, resulting in a miss.

For the low base strong super reach A fluctuation pattern type, the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, which is 103,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance, and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, a low base strong super reach A reach performance is executed and a miss is obtained in PA2-4, and the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, which is 113,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PA2-5, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are performed, followed by a low base strong super reach A reach performance, resulting in a miss; and PA2-6, in which the special chart variation time is 40,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in a 50,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, followed by a low base strong super reach A reach performance, resulting in a miss.

For the low base strong super reach B fluctuation pattern type, the special chart fluctuation time is 108,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in 118,000 ms, and PA2-7, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance, and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach performance, resulting in a miss, is executed, and the special chart fluctuation time is 123,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in 113,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PA2-8, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are performed, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach performance, resulting in a miss; and PA2-9, in which the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, totaling 55,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach performance, resulting in a miss.

For the low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern type, the special chart fluctuation time is 118,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, which is 128,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance, and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, a low base strong super reach C reach performance is executed and a miss is executed in PA2-10, and the special chart fluctuation time is 123,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, which is 133,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PA2-11, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are performed, followed by a low base strong super reach C reach performance, resulting in a miss; and PA2-12, in which the special chart variation time is 50,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in a 60,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, followed by a low base strong super reach C reach performance, resulting in a miss.

For the low base strongest super reach type, the special chart fluctuation time is 128,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, making it 138,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance, and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, the low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, making it a miss, in PA2-13, the special chart fluctuation time is 133,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, making it 143,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PA2-14, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are performed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance, resulting in a miss; and PA2-15, in which the special chart variation time is 60,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in a total of 70,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance, resulting in a miss.

The variation pattern type of high base super reach A is PA2-16, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in 40,000 ms, and the reach performance of the normal reach is executed, followed by the reach performance of the high base super reach A, resulting in a miss.The variation pattern type of high base super reach B is PA2-17, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in 40,000 ms, and the reach performance of the normal reach is executed, followed by the reach performance of the high base super reach B, resulting in a miss. For the high base super reach C variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-18, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in a miss, and the high base super reach C reach performance is executed after the normal reach reach performance is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base super reach D variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-19, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, resulting in a miss, and the high base super reach D reach performance is executed after the normal reach reach performance is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot fluctuation patterns are similar to the miss fluctuation patterns in that the following fluctuation patterns are provided: low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern type of low base strong super reach A is 108,000 ms, which is the sum of 93,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and PB1-2, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance, and a base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach A reach performance, resulting in a jackpot; There are three types of fluctuation patterns: PB1-3, which lasts 8,000 ms and involves two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach B reach performance, followed by a low base strong super reach A reach performance resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-4, which lasts 55,000 ms, which is the sum of 40,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and involves a normal reach reach performance followed by a low base strong super reach A reach performance resulting in a jackpot.

The fluctuation pattern type of low base strong super reach B is 123,000 ms, which is the sum of 108,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and PB1-5, which is a jackpot that is achieved by executing two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach A reach performance, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach performance, and the special chart fluctuation time is 128,000 ms, which is the sum of 113,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PB1-6, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach performance, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-7, in which the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, resulting in a jackpot, followed by a normal reach reach performance, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach performance.

The fluctuation pattern type of low base strong super reach C is 133,000 ms, which is the sum of 118,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance, and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, the low base strong super reach C reach performance is executed, resulting in a jackpot. PB1-8, the special chart fluctuation time is 138,000 ms, which is the sum of 123,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms. There are three types of fluctuation patterns: PB1-9, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach C reach performance, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-10, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, resulting in a 65,000 ms, and a normal reach reach performance is followed by a low base strong super reach C reach performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The fluctuation pattern type of the low base strongest super reach is 143,000 ms, which is the sum of 128,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance, and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, resulting in a jackpot, PB1-11, and the special chart fluctuation time is 148,000 ms, which is the sum of 133,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PB1-12, in which two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach performance, and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-13, in which the special chart variation time is 75,000 ms, which is the sum of 60,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and after the normal reach reach performance, a low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the high base Super Reach A variation pattern, there is one type of variation pattern PB1-14, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, resulting in a jackpot, and the high base Super Reach A reach performance is executed after the normal reach reach performance, resulting in a jackpot.For the high base Super Reach B variation pattern, there is one type of variation pattern PB1-15, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, resulting in a jackpot, and the high base Super Reach B reach performance is executed after the normal reach reach performance. The variation pattern type of high base super reach C is PB1-16, which is 45,000 ms, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and the high base super reach C reach performance is executed after the normal reach reach performance, resulting in a jackpot. The variation pattern type of high base super reach D is PB1-17, which is 45,000 ms, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and the high base super reach D reach performance is executed after the normal reach reach performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The judgment table stored in ROM 101 includes a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining the type of fluctuation pattern according to the game state and the variable display result, and a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern type judgment table, the game state, the variable display result, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display (reserved memory number for variable display).

In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game state and the variable display result. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the read random number value MR3 to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 12 (A) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern type determination table A is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 12 (B) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern type determination table B is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 12(C) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A with the value of the random number value MR3. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 20766 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

Also, if the game state is the time-saving state or the probability change state and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 12(D) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B with the value of the random number value MR3. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 975, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

After the type of variation pattern is determined as described above, one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 13 to 15 is selected according to the game state, the variable display result, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display (reserved number of items for variable display), and the selected variation pattern determination table is compared with the read random number value MR4 to determine the variation pattern.

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved memories for variable display is 0 to 2, the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 13(A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1A if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 140, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1B if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 141 to 220, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1C if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 221 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is a low base weak super reach, if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-2, and if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 200 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-3.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved memories for variable display is three, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 13(B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1A if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 140, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1B if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 141 to 220, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1C if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 221 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is a time-saving state or a sure-win state, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 14 is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 200, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-4 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 201 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-1A if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-18 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-19 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 15 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-2, if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-3, and if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-5, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-6, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-8, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-9, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-11, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-12, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is a time-saving state or a sure-win state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 15(B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-14. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-15. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-16. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-17.

By determining the type of fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern as described above, in this embodiment, when the game state is normal (low base state), the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set to be the highest when the low base strongest super reach reach performance is finally executed, and when the low base strong super reach C reach performance is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set to be lower than when the low base strongest super reach reach performance is finally executed.

When the low base strong super reach B reach performance is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set lower than when the low base strong super reach C reach performance is finally executed, and when the low base strong super reach A reach performance is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set lower than when the low base strong super reach B reach performance is finally executed (jackpot expectation in low base state: low base strongest super reach > low base strong super reach C > low base strong super reach B > low base strong super reach A).

In addition, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability of a special state (high base state), the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set to be the highest when the high base Super Reach D reach effect is finally executed, and the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set to be lower when the high base Super Reach C reach effect is finally executed than when the high base Super Reach D reach effect is finally executed.

When the high base Super Reach B reach performance is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set lower than when the high base Super Reach C reach performance is finally executed, and when the high base Super Reach A reach performance is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set lower than when the high base Super Reach B reach performance is finally executed (jackpot expectation in high base state: high base Super Reach D > high base Super Reach C > high base Super Reach B > high base Super Reach A).

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the normal reach reach performance is executed to result in a jackpot or a non-reach jackpot in both cases where the game state is a low base state and a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide cases where the normal reach reach performance is executed to result in a jackpot or a non-reach jackpot. Furthermore, the cases where the normal reach reach performance is executed to result in a jackpot or a non-reach jackpot may be provided in both cases where the game state is a low base state and a high base state, or only in one of them.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 003SG150 as shown in FIG. 16 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 003SG150 shown in FIG. 16 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 003SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 003SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 003SG151C, a game control flag setting section 003SG152, a game control timer setting section 003SG153, a game control counter setting section 003SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 003SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151A stores the reserved data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started but in which a start winning (first start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151B stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 003SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start entry port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 003SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 003SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 003SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 003SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 003SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 003SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 003SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 003SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 003SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 003SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 003SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR5, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 003SG190 as shown in Figure 17 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 003SG190 shown in Figure 17 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 003SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 003SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 003SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 003SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 003SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 003SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 003SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 003SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 003SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 003SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 003SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 003SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 003SG194A as shown in FIG. 17(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 003SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 003SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special chart being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer 003SG194A also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special chart being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), a pattern designation command, and a variable category command, are sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 003SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, reserved memory number notification command, pattern designation command, and variable category command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start winning time receiving command buffer 003SG194A has a memory area reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, a pending display final mode flag in which a flag value corresponding to the final display pattern of the pending memory display is set, and a pending display change timing flag in which a flag value corresponding to the timing at which the display pattern of the pending memory display changes to the final display pattern can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart pending memory and the second special chart pending memory.

In the hold display final mode flag, if the execution of a hold display effect is not decided in the hold display effect setting process described below, a "0" corresponding to the normal hold display display pattern is stored, and if the execution of a hold display effect is decided, a "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to a hold memory display display pattern that is a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) is set. After the hold display effect decision process is executed, the hold display update process described below is further executed, so that the active display and hold display are displayed in a mode according to each hold display flag (for example, if the hold display flag value is "0", a white circle (○), if the hold display flag value is "1", a square (◇), and if the hold display flag value is "2", a star (☆) is displayed).

The hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal hold display pattern, and when it is decided to execute the hold display effect, the value of the hold display final mode flag is set according to the timing that corresponds to the value of the hold display change timing flag.

In this embodiment, the value of the hold display change timing flag indicates the timing at which each hold memory is shifted as a hold memory for each buffer number, and the performance control CPU 120 executes a process to set the value of the hold display final state flag as the value of the hold display flag at the timing at which each hold memory is shifted as a hold memory for a buffer number corresponding to the value of the hold display change timing flag.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 003SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 003SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the variable category command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the variable category command are stored in sequence in the storage areas corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer 003SG194A shown in FIG. 17(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 17(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (step S8). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was fluctuating, it is sufficient if the fluctuating special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, the process enters into a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Fig. 19. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Fig. 19 starts, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, the pachinko game machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormalities, and a warning can be generated if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, a predetermined information output process is executed to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has been reached) that is supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 19. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a determined special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 82 and 83 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the maximum open period during which the jackpot opening port is open, the jackpot opening port to be opened, and the maximum number of times the round can be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switches 23 and 24. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
21 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 20. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (003SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (003SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) or not (003SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 003SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 003SGS102 is not the upper limit (003SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 is set to "0" (003SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 003SGS101 (003SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 003SGS102 (003SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (003SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (003SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (003SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 003SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 003SGS105 (003SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 is set to "2" (003SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 003SGS103 and 003SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (003SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (003SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 003SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 003SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 003SG154 (003SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random number values thus extracted and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserve memory unit (003SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 003SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 003SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (003SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of 003SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step 003SGS112), and then performs settings for sending a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (003SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special pattern process process has ended.

After executing the process of 003SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (003SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 003SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (003SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 003SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (003SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Random value judgment process when winning)
FIG. 22(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 003SGS112 of FIG. 21 as a winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, a determination is made by a special symbol normal process described later as to whether or not the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In addition, in a variable pattern setting process described later, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of step 003SGS112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on the result of this determination, the performance control CPU 120 or the like will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 22(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the probability variable flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 003SG152 (step 003SGS121). When the probability variable flag is on, the CPU 103 identifies the probability variable state (high probability, high base state), when the probability variable flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving state (low probability, high base state), and when both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off, the normal state (low probability, low base state).

Following the processing of step 003SGS121, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 8 is selected and set (step 003SGS122). Then, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment extracted in step 003SGS109 of FIG. 17 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 003SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table selected by the processing of step 003SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 003SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 003SGS123; N), the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss" is executed (step 003SGS128), and a miss variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the game state is selected (step 003SGS130). For example, if the game state is the normal state, the miss variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 12(A) may be selected, and if the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the miss variation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 12(B) may be selected.

Also, if it is determined in step 003SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 003SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 9(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 003SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type is executed (step 003SGS133), i.e., the second symbol designation command for jackpot A, the third symbol designation command for jackpot B, and the fourth symbol designation command for jackpot C, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set according to the game state as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 003SGS135). In addition, in the processing of step 003SGS135, if the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table B is set.

After executing steps 003SGS130 and 003SGS135, the CPU 103 uses each of the variation pattern type determination tables set in each step and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to determine the variation category according to the range of the determination value that includes the random number value MR3 (step 003SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and an "other" variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to be able to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 003SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 003SGS139), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 20 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 23, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 003SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 003SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 003SGS141 (step 003SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 003SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 003SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 003SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 003SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 003SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 003SGS141 (step 003SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 003SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 003SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the processing of step 003SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 003SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 003SGS145 (step 003SGS145; N), the following numerical data are read out as reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "0": random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 003SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 003SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry (step 003SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 003SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 003SGS149.

In step 003SGS149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 8 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 003SGS150). In addition, in this step 003SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of winning is low and the probability flag is off (in this embodiment, the probability is low and the probability is high), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the result of the special chart display falls within the range of 0 to 218, it is judged as a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table selected in step 003SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so in the processing of step 003SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine whether the special game display result is a "jackpot", so that when the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is judged (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 003SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 003SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 003SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 003SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot type the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 003SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 003SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be either a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability-changing state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state, before the derivation of the fixed special symbol as a variable display result. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 003SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, it can be set to "0", if it is jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is jackpot C, it can be set to "3". After the process of step 003SGS155, proceed to step 003SGS156.

Also, if step 003SGS150 determines that the result is a miss (step 003SGS150; N), step 003SGS156 is executed without executing steps 003SGS152 to 003SGS155.

In step 003SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be "jackpot" in step 003SGS150, if the jackpot type in step 003SGS154 is "jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "2" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Note that these fixed special symbols are just examples, and other fixed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as fixed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 003SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 003SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 003SGS145 (step 003SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 003SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 20 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 selects a fluctuation pattern type determination table according to the state (step 003SGS160a). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is a normal state, the miss fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 12 (A) is selected, while if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the miss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 12 (B) is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is a normal state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 12 (C) is selected, while if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 12 (D) is selected.

Then, based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern stored in a fluctuation random number buffer, the selected (set) fluctuation pattern type determination table is referenced to determine the type of fluctuation pattern to one of several types (step 003SGS160b).

The CPU 103 further selects a variation pattern determination table according to the state (step 003SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is normal and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 13(A) is selected, if the game state is normal and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 3, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 13(B) is selected, and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, the miss variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 14 is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is normal, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 15(A) is selected, and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 15(B) is selected.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer, and the determined type of fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table (step 003SGS162).

After the variation pattern is determined in step 003SGS162, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 003SGS163). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 003SGS163, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 003SGS164). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 003SGS164, the special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the variation pattern, is set (step 003SGS165). The special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game to the fixed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), being displayed stationary. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special pattern variation process (step 003SGS166), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 003SGS166, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 20 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol by turning on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S113 (step 003SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 003SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 003SGS182).

When the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 003SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 003SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a jackpot start 1 designation command (jackpot A), a jackpot start 2 designation command (jackpot B), or a jackpot start 3 designation command (jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 003SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 003SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 003SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot openings have been made is set in the jackpot opening count counter (for example, 6 times for jackpot A or jackpot B, and 10 times for jackpot C) (step 003SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 003SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 003SGS182; N), step 003SGS191 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 003SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 003SGS191; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 003SGS191; Y), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 003SGS191; Y), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196. If the time-saving counter is on (step 003SGS192; Y), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 003SGS192; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 003SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 003SGS194; N), and if it is not "0" (step 003SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 003SGS194; Y), the time-saving flag is cleared to the OFF state in order to end the time-saving control (step 003SGS195). At this time, the CPU 103 also determines whether the probability of winning flag is ON or not (step 003SGS195a). If the high probability flag is off (step 003SGS195a; N), proceed to step 003SGS196. If the high probability flag is on (step 003SGS195a; Y), clear the high probability flag to the off state (step 003SGS195b) and proceed to step 003SGS196.

In step 003SGS196, the sending of a game state designation command is set according to the state of the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 003SGS197).

(Processing during jackpot opening)
Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of Fig. 20 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in Fig. 26, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the opening time timer by 1 (step 003SGS201), and judges whether the opening time timer has timed out (step 003SGS202). If the opening time timer has not timed out (step 003SGS202; N), it further judges whether it is time to open the large prize opening (step 003SGS203). Whether it is time to open the large prize opening can be judged, for example, by the value of the opening time timer.

If it is not the time to open the large prize opening (step 003SGS203; N), proceed to step 003SGS206. If it is the time to open the large prize opening (step 003SGS203; Y), control the large prize opening to be opened to an open state (step 003SGS204), set the sending of a command to specify that the large prize opening is open according to the round, and proceed to step 003SGS206 (step 003SGS205).

In the process of step 003SGS206, the CPU 103 judges whether the first count switch 23 is on or not (step 003SGS206). If the first count switch 23 is not on (step 003SGS206; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS209. If the first count switch 23 is on (step 003SGS206; Y), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (step 003SGS207), and a prize ball payout process is executed to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls (step 003SGS208). Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting for the large prize opening winning designation command (step 003SGS208a), and proceeds to step 003SGS209.

In the process of step 003SGS209, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 24 is on (step 003SGS209). If the second count switch 24 is not on (step 003SGS209; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS215. If the second count switch 24 is on (step 003SGS209; Y), the CPU 103 increments the value of the winning ball counter by +1 (step 003SGS210), executes the prize ball payout process, which is the same process as step 003SGS208 (step 003SGS211), and sets up the transmission of a command to designate winning of the large winning port (step 003SGS211a).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag, which indicates that the game ball has already been detected by the second count switch 24 (the second count switch 24 has been turned on), is in the ON state (step 003SGS212). If the V winning flag is not in the ON state (step 003SGS212; Y), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 003SGS215, and if the V winning flag is in the ON state (step 003SGS212; N), the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag to the ON state (step 003SGS213), sets the V winning notification command for transmission, and proceeds to step 003SGS215 (step 003SGS214).

In the processing of step 003SGS215, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter is equal to or greater than the large prize opening closing threshold, that is, whether the value of the winning number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 10) for closing the large prize opening (step 003SGS215). If the value of the winning number counter is less than the large prize opening closing threshold (step 003SGS215; N), the processing during the large win opening is terminated, and if the value of the winning number counter is equal to or greater than the large prize opening closing threshold (step 003SGS215; Y), the large prize opening to be opened is controlled to a closed state (step 003SGS216). Then, the sending of a command designated after the big prize opening is set according to the round (step 003SGS217), the value of the opening count counter is decremented by 1 (step 003SGS218), the value of the special chart process flag is updated to a value according to the processing after the big prize opening, and the processing during the big prize opening is terminated (step 003SGS219).

The command that is set for transmission during the jackpot release process is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 19.

In addition, although not specifically shown, in the post-jackpot release processing, if the completed round play is the last round play in the jackpot play state (if the value of the release count counter is 0), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing, and if the completed round play is not the last round play in the jackpot play state (if the value of the release count counter is 1 or more), it sets a round start waiting timer and updates the value of the special chart process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release processing.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S117 of FIG. 20 as the jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 003SGS221). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 003SGS221; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 003SGS222), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 003SGS221; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 003SGS223). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 003SGS224). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 003SGS224; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is ON (step 003SGS225).

If the V-winning flag is on (step 003SGS225; Y), the sure-change flag and time-saving flag are turned on (steps 003SGS227, 003SGS228). In addition, the V-winning flag is cleared and the process proceeds to step 003SGS232 (step 003SGS229). On the other hand, if the V-winning flag is off (step 003SGS225; N), the time-saving flag is turned on and the process proceeds to step 003SGS232 (step 003SGS231).

Then, in step 003SGS232, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving counter to "100". The CPU 103 also turns off the jackpot flag (step 003SGS233) and sets the transmission of a jackpot end command according to the type of jackpot (step 003SGS234). Then, after setting the transmission of a game state designation command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 003SGS235), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special pattern, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (step 003SGS236).

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 28. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 28 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, the operation of displaying the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of lighting the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the operation of driving the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various performance devices. In addition, the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect (display of a demo movie) on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control can be executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of a specific presentation or a change in the game state during variable display.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command until the customer waiting demo performance starts, and may start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
Fig. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Fig. 28 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Fig. 29, the performance control CPU 120 first executes each of the processes of the pending display performance setting processing (step S160), the pending display update processing (step S161), the first right hit display performance processing (step S162), the second right hit display performance processing (step S163), the first left hit display performance processing (step S164), and the second left hit display performance processing (step S165).

In the hold display effect setting process, a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a hold display effect in which the display mode of the hold display based on a new start winning is changed to a shape such as a square or star, which indicates a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, if the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a hold display effect in the hold display effect setting process, it determines the final mode of the hold display based on a new instruction winning and the timing at which the hold display will change to the final mode. Then, depending on the contents of these decisions, it sets predetermined values to the hold display flag, hold display final mode flag, and hold display change timing flag of the hold memory based on a new start winning in the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A.

In the pending display update process, for example, at the start timing of the variable display of a new special pattern, the performance control CPU 120 refers to the memory contents (contents of the pending memory) of the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A and executes a process to start displaying a new pending display. Furthermore, in the pending display update process, it is determined whether it is the timing of the change in the display mode of each pending display from the pending display change timing flag value stored in association with each pending memory. For the pending display, which is the timing of the change in the display mode, the pending display final mode flag value stored in association with the pending memory corresponding to the pending display is stored as the pending display flag value. Finally, the performance control CPU 120 may change the pending display to a mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag for each pending memory stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A. Note that the pending display update process in this embodiment is also a process to execute a pending display appearance performance described later by starting the display of a new pending display as described above, and is also a process to execute a pending change performance described later by changing the display mode of the pending display as described above.

In the first right-hit display presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a process to display a first right-hit display on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R based on the variable display result being a jackpot. In the second right-hit display presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a process to display a second right-hit display on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R when the game state is a jackpot game state or a high base state. The second right-hit display is smaller in size than the first right-hit display and is displayed in a different display area from the first right-hit display.

In the first left hit display presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a process to display a first left hit display that instructs the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L based on the game state being controlled from a time-saving state or a probability change state (high base state) to a normal state (low base state). In the second left hit display presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a process to display a second left hit display that instructs the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L based on the game ball being shot toward the right game area 2R in the normal state. The presentation control CPU 120 may display the second left hit display based on receiving a command or the like from the CPU 103 indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 41 in the normal state.

After executing the processes of steps S160 to S166, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 29. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 003SGS301). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 003SGS301; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 003SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 003SGS302). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 003SGS301 (step 003SGS301; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 003SGS303). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 003SGS303; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 003SGS303; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 003SGS304). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 003SGS302 or step 003SGS304, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 003SGS305).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 003SGS306). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 003SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned in even numbers as the stopping symbols at a higher rate than a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned in odd numbers other than 7. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, the CPU 120 determines, as the stopping symbols, a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned in odd numbers other than 7 at a higher rate than a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned in even numbers. And when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, the CPU 120 determines, as the stopping symbols, a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned in 7. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the system determines a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a miss such as "767" (a losing symbol) according to the variation pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 003SGS306, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a variable display start pattern enlargement presentation setting process (step 003SGS307) for executing a variable display start pattern enlargement presentation in which a decorative pattern is enlarged when the variable display starts, a line preview presentation setting process (step 003SGS308) for executing a first line preview presentation and a second line preview presentation which indicate the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot by displaying lines during the variable display, and a preview button presentation which instructs the player to operate the push button 31B immediately before the first line preview presentation and the second line preview presentation, and a weak super reach title presentation setting process (step 003SGS309) for executing a weak super reach title presentation which displays the title of a weak super reach presentation during the variable display due to the Super Reach fluctuation pattern. Step 003SGS309), during the variable display according to the Super Reach fluctuation pattern, a strong super reach title effect setting process (step 003SGS310) is executed to execute a strong super reach title effect that displays the title of the strong super reach effect, during the strong super reach reach effect, a cut-in effect setting process (step 003SGS311) is executed to execute a cut-in effect that displays a cut-in image that suggests the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, during the strong super reach reach effect, and a deciding button effect setting process (step 003SGS312) is executed to execute a deciding button effect that instructs the player to operate the push button 31B immediately before announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss during the strong super reach reach effect.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 003SGS314), and starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 003SGS315).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 003SGS316). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 003SGS317). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 003SGS318). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 003SGS319).

(Performance processing during big win)
31 is a flow chart showing the jackpot performance process (step S174) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 29. In the jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a performance according to the jackpot type and round of the jackpot game being played (step 003SGS321). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot game being played is a jackpot game in a high base state, that is, whether the jackpot game is based on the variable display of the second special symbol (003SGS322). Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special pattern can only be controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot A and jackpot B, and a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special pattern can only be controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot C.Therefore, whether or not the jackpot game in progress is a jackpot game in a high base state can be determined by whether or not the jackpot game in progress is a jackpot game of jackpot C.

If the jackpot game being played is not a jackpot game in a high base state (step 003SGS322; N), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a V challenge presentation process (step 003SGS323) for executing a V challenge presentation suggesting that the jackpot game is a jackpot B jackpot game, a V challenge success presentation process (step 003SGS324) for executing a V challenge success presentation notifying that the jackpot game is a jackpot B jackpot game, and a V prize announcement presentation process (step 003SGS325) for executing a V prize announcement presentation notifying that the game ball has entered the second large prize opening during the jackpot game, i.e., that a V prize has occurred.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game being played is a jackpot game in a high base state (step 003SGS322; Y), the performance control CPU 120 executes a reserved sequence suggestion performance process (step 003SGS326) to execute a reserved sequence suggestion performance that suggests that there is a reserved memory in the reserved memory of the second special pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (suggesting that a so-called reserved sequence will occur, in which the jackpot game state is controlled without a new start winning occurring after the jackpot game ends), and a reserved sequence notification performance process (step 003SGS327) to execute a reserved sequence notification performance that notifies that there is a reserved memory in the reserved memory of the second special pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (notifying that a reserved sequence will occur).

In addition, after executing the processing of steps 003SGS325 and 003SGS327, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a first prize ball notification presentation process (step 003SGS328) to execute a first prize ball number notification presentation that updates the display of the number of prize balls (first prize ball number) acquired in all jackpot game states from when the jackpot game state is controlled in the normal state until the normal state is controlled again, each time a jackpot opening designation command is received, and a second prize ball notification presentation process (step 003SGS329) to execute a second prize ball notification presentation that displays the number of prize balls (second prize ball number) based on the jackpot opening designation command, each time a jackpot opening designation command is received.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 32 to 34, the effects executed during the variable display and the effects that can be executed differ depending on the variation pattern. For example, the pattern expansion effect at the start of the variable display cannot be executed in the variable display of the non-reach variation pattern, but can be executed in the variable display of the normal reach or super reach variation pattern. In addition, while the pseudo consecutive effect may be executed in the variable display when the game state is in the normal state (low base state), the pseudo consecutive effect may not be executed in the variable display when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state (high base state), and the reach suggestion effect may be executed instead of the pseudo consecutive effect. In addition, the pattern alignment effect is an effect that is always executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot when the game state is in the low base state and when it is in the high base state. In addition, although not shown in Fig. 33, the reach suggestion effect and the cut-in effect can be executed in PA2-16 to PA2-19, which are the variation patterns of the high base state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a particular effect is executed and the effect pattern differ depending on the fluctuation pattern. For example, among the fluctuation patterns that execute pseudo consecutive effects, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1B executes the pseudo consecutive effect once during variable display, while PA2-1C, PA2-2 to PA2-5, PA2-7 to PA2-8, PA2-9 to PA2-10, PA2-13 to PA2-14, PB1-2 to PB1-3, PB1-5 to PB1-6, PB1-8 to PB1-9, and PB1-11 to PB1-12 execute the pseudo consecutive effect twice.

In addition, among the variable patterns that execute the weak super reach effect, PA2-2, PA2-4, PA2-7, PA2-10, PA2-13, PB1-2, PB1-5, PB1-8, and PB1-11 execute the low base weak super reach A reach effect during variable display, while PA2-3, PA2-5, PA2-8, PA2-11, PA2-14, PB1-3, PB1-6, PB1-9, and PB1-12 execute the low base weak super reach B reach effect during variable display.

In addition, among the variable patterns that execute the strong super reach effect, PA2-4 to PA2-6 and PB1-2 to PB1-4 execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A during variable display, PA2-7 to PA2-9 and PB1-5 to PB1-7 execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B during variable display, PA2-10 to PA2-12 and PB1-8 to PB1-10 execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C during variable display, and PA2-13 to PA2-15 and PB1-11 execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C during variable display. ～PB1-13 executes the reach performance of low base strong super reach D during variable display, PA2-16 and PB1-14 execute the reach performance of high base super reach A during variable display, PA2-17 and PB1-15 execute the reach performance of high base super reach B during variable display, PA2-18 and PB1-16 execute the reach performance of high base super reach C during variable display, and PA2-19 and PB1-17 execute the reach performance of high base super reach D during variable display.

(Details of the effect display)
The effects shown in Figures 29 to 34 include effects that are displayed on the image display device 5 when executed.

Figures 35 and 36 are explanatory diagrams of the effects displayed on the image display device when executed in this embodiment. The enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of variable display is an effect in which the decorative pattern is enlarged at the start of variable display in the low base state and the high base state, and a decorative effect is displayed as the first effect in this invention for the decorative pattern at the time of these enlarged displays. The preview button effect is an effect in which an operation prompting image is displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B immediately before the first line preview effect, the second line preview effect, and the cut-in effect during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect, is displayed for the operation prompting image when the operation prompting image is displayed. Note that the brightness of the light-emitting effect in the preview button effect is displayed at a lower brightness than the light-emitting effect in the deciding button effect described later.

The first line preview performance is a performance in which, during variable display between the low base state and the high base state, the first line (line A or line B) is displayed immediately after the preview button performance ends (immediately after the player operates push button 31B or immediately after the operation acceptance period ends), and an enlargement effect is displayed on the first line when it is displayed.

The second line preview performance is a performance in which, during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, the second line (line C or line D) is displayed immediately after the preview button performance ends (immediately after the player operates push button 31B or immediately after the operation acceptance period ends), and when the second line is displayed, a decorative effect is displayed as the second effect in this invention, targeting the second line.

The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance in which the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C during variable display in the low base state, and the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returned to the size just before the temporary stop) at the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped. In addition, the pseudo consecutive performance is a performance in which an enlargement effect is displayed for the pseudo consecutive patterns when the pseudo consecutive patterns are enlarged and reduced, and a decorative effect is displayed for the pseudo consecutive patterns just before the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped.

The reach suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display in progress will be in reach during the variable display in the high base state, and when the variable display in progress is not in reach, that is, when it is a non-reach miss, when a non-reach miss notification image is displayed indicating that it will be a non-reach miss, a decorative effect as the third effect of the present invention is displayed with the non-reach miss notification image as the target.

The normal reach effect is an effect that suggests that the reach effect will develop into a weak super reach or a strongest super reach during the variable display in a low base state, and is an effect that displays an enlarged effect on the decorative symbols that make up the reach when the reach occurs (the decorative symbols that stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R).

The weak super reach title effect is an effect that displays the title of the weak super reach reach effect that will be executed subsequently during the variable display in the low base state, and when the title of the weak super reach reach effect is displayed, an enlarged effect is displayed targeting the title of the weak super reach reach effect.

The development effect is an effect that notifies the player that the weak super reach reach effect will progress to a strong super reach reach effect during variable display in the low base state by temporarily stopping the development pattern in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C, and displays both an enlargement effect and a decorative effect on the development pattern when it is displayed (temporarily stopped).

The strong super reach title performance is a performance that displays the title of the strong super reach reach performance that will be executed subsequently during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and when the title of the strong super reach reach performance is displayed, both an enlargement effect and a decorative effect are displayed on the title of the strong super reach reach performance.

The cut-in effect is an effect that suggests the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by displaying a cut-in image during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and when the cut-in image is displayed, an enlarged effect is displayed with the cut-in image as the target.

The deciding button effect is an effect that displays an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B immediately before displaying the result of the strong super reach reach effect, i.e., the result notification image of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state, during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and is an effect that displays a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect, on the operation prompting image when it is displayed. Note that the brightness of the light-emitting effect in the deciding button effect is displayed at a higher brightness than the light-emitting effect in the advance notice button effect described above.

The pattern alignment effect is an effect that is executed after an image indicating a jackpot is displayed as a result of the strong super reach reach effect during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and is an effect in which the same decorative patterns are displayed stopped in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and these decorative patterns are temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returning to the size they were just before the stopped display). The pattern alignment effect is an effect that targets these decorative patterns and displays a decorative effect when the same decorative patterns are displayed stopped (when patterns are aligned), and displays an enlargement effect when these decorative patterns are reduced in size.

The enlargement effect when a pattern stops is an effect that is executed each time a decorative pattern stops (excluding the middle pattern that is variable and executes a super reach) during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and temporarily enlarges and then reduces the size of these decorative patterns (returning them to the size they were in immediately before they stopped). The enlargement effect when a pattern stops is an effect that targets these decorative patterns and displays a decorative effect when the same decorative pattern stops (when the patterns line up), and displays an enlargement effect when these decorative patterns are reduced in size. The enlargement effect when a pattern stops is an effect that targets these decorative patterns and displays a decorative effect as the fourth effect of the present invention when they stop.

The pending display appearance effect is an effect that displays a pending display based on a new start winning (a new pending memory) in the special chart pending memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of a new start winning (the occurrence of a new pending memory) in the low base state and the high base state. In addition, from the start of the display of the pending display based on the new start winning, it is an effect that displays a decorative effect as a light-emitting effect in this invention for the pending display based on the new start winning.

The hold change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display being displayed in the low base state and the high base state from a white circle to a white square, star, or other shape that indicates a high probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display changes, a decorative effect is displayed as a light-emitting effect in this invention for the hold display whose display mode is changing.

The first right-hit display effect is an effect that displays a first right-hit display on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R during a jackpot game state. In addition, it is an effect that displays a decorative effect targeting the first right-hit display when the display of the first right-hit display starts and while it is being displayed.

The second right-hit display effect is an effect in which, in the high base state and in the jackpot game state, the image display device 5 displays a second right-hit display that instructs the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. In addition, while the second right-hit display is being displayed, it is an effect in which a decorative effect is displayed with the second right-hit display as the target.

The first left hit display effect is an effect in which, in a low base state, a first left hit display is displayed on the image display device 5, instructing the player to shoot a game ball toward the left game area 2L, based on the change in the game state from a high base state to the low base state. In addition, while the first left hit display is being displayed, a decorative effect is displayed with the first left hit display as the target.

The second left hit display effect is an effect in which, based on detecting that the game ball has been hit toward the right game area 2R in the low base state, the image display device 5 displays a second left hit display instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area 2L. In addition, while the second left hit display is being displayed, it is an effect in which a decorative effect is displayed with the second left hit display as the target. Note that whether or not the game ball has been hit toward the right game area 2R in the low base state can be determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 in the low base state.

The fanfare effect is an effect in which, during a jackpot game state, a display such as "BONUS" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player that control over the opening of the jackpot opening will be executed. In addition, the fanfare effect is an effect in which an enlarged effect is displayed on the display such as "BONUS."

The V Challenge effect is an effect that, in a jackpot game state, suggests that the jackpot game is a jackpot B jackpot game, that is, an effect that suggests that the opening control of the second large prize winning port will be executed during the jackpot game. In addition, the V Challenge effect is an effect that displays a message on the image display device 5 encouraging the player to repeatedly press the push button 31B, such as "Press the button repeatedly," and updates the meter displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and displays an enlarged effect targeting the message.

The V Challenge Successful Presentation is a presentation in which, in a jackpot game state, the jackpot game being played is a jackpot B, and the meter is updated to a full display corresponding to a jackpot B based on the push button 31B being pressed a specified number of times during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B during the V Challenge presentation, or the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B during the V Challenge presentation having ended. In addition, the V Challenge Successful Presentation is a presentation in which an enlargement effect and a decorative effect are displayed on the meter at the time the meter is updated to a full display.

The V winning effect is an effect that, in a jackpot game state, when the game ball enters the second large winning slot after the V challenge success effect, i.e., a V winning has occurred, and displays a "V" on the image display device 5 to indicate that a V winning has occurred, and then temporarily enlarges and then reduces the "V" display (returning it to the size it was just before the enlarged display). The V winning effect is also an effect that targets the "V" display, displays an enlargement effect when the "V" display is reduced, and displays a decorative effect when the "V" display begins to be displayed and while it is being displayed.

The reserved consecutive indication effect is an effect that indicates that in the jackpot game state of jackpot C, that is, in the jackpot game state during consecutive jackpots, there is a reserved memory in the second special pattern reserved memory whose variable display result is a jackpot, that is, an effect that indicates that a so-called reserved consecutive will occur, in which the jackpot game state is controlled again based on the variable display of the second special pattern for the first to fourth times even if a new second special pattern reserved memory does not occur after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the reserved consecutive indication effect is an effect that displays an operation prompting image on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to operate the push button 31B, and displays a decorative effect as the appearance effect of the present invention at the start of displaying the operation prompting image for the operation prompting image, and displays a decorative effect different from the display start while the operation prompting image is being displayed.

The pending consecutive notification effect is an effect in which, in the jackpot C jackpot game state, there is a pending memory in the second special chart pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and based on the push button 31B being operated during the pending consecutive suggestion effect during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B during the pending consecutive suggestion effect, a "V" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the "V" display is temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returning to the size immediately before the enlarged display). The pending consecutive notification effect is also an effect that targets the "V" display, displays an enlargement effect when the "V" display is reduced, and displays a decorative effect when the "V" display starts and is being displayed.

In addition, the display of the "V" in the consecutive pending notification effect in this embodiment is different from the display of the "V" in the V winning effect (for example, the size, display color, and shape are different), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the "V" may be the same for the consecutive pending notification effect and the V winning effect.

The first prize ball number notification effect is an effect that updates the total prize ball number display (display of the total number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state from when the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in the normal state until when it is controlled to the low base state) displayed on the image display device 5 for each winning number of game balls that enter the jackpot winning slot during the jackpot game state. In addition, the first prize ball number notification effect is an effect that displays a decorative effect on the total prize ball number display when the total prize ball display is updated.

The second prize ball notification effect is an effect that displays a specific prize ball number display corresponding to the prize ball number of "5000" or "10000" on the image display device 5 based on the fact that the total prize ball number display (display of the total prize ball number paid out in the jackpot game state from when the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in the normal state until when the game ball is controlled to the low base state) displayed on the image display device 5 for each winning number of game balls in the jackpot game port during the jackpot game state has been updated to a specific mode (for example, display of a value corresponding to the number of prize balls such as "5000" or "10000"). The second prize ball notification effect is also an effect that displays a decorative effect on the specific prize ball number display when the specific prize ball number display is displayed.

The ending performance is a performance in which, in a jackpot game state, a display (such as "Enter BATTLE RUSH!!") is displayed according to the controlled game state (high base state) based on the completion of all control over the opening of the large prize opening in that jackpot game, and the display according to the controlled game state is temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returning to the size it was before the enlarged display). The ending performance is also a performance in which, for the display according to the controlled game state, an enlargement effect is displayed when the display according to the controlled game state is reduced.

(Hold display performance setting process)
In the pending display effect setting process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A and determines whether there is an entry in which the pending display flag or the pending display final mode flag is not set. If there is an entry in which the pending display flag or the pending display final mode flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the design designation command and variable category command of the entry. Then, based on the identified variable display result, it determines whether or not to execute the pending display effect and the effect pattern.

In this embodiment, the presentation patterns for the hold display presentation are presentation pattern A and presentation pattern B. If it is decided to execute the hold display presentation using presentation pattern A, the hold memory display is displayed as a white square (◇), and if it is decided to execute the hold display presentation using presentation pattern B, the hold memory display is displayed as a white star (☆). If it is decided not to execute the hold display presentation, the hold memory display is displayed as a white circle (○).

As shown in FIG. 37(A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in presentation pattern A, and a 70% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in presentation pattern B. If the variable display result is a non-reach miss, there is a 95% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 5% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in presentation pattern A, and a 0% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in presentation pattern B. If the variable display result is a normal reach miss, there is a 75% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 20% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in presentation pattern A, and a 5% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in presentation pattern B. If the variable display result is a miss for the Super Reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern A, and a 10% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern B.

When the presentation control CPU 120 determines not to execute the pending display presentation, it sets the pending display flag and the pending display final state flag to "0" in the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A for the entry that was the subject of the pending display presentation determination.

Next, if it has been decided that the pending display effect will be executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing at which the display mode of the pending memory display will change to a display mode corresponding to the pending display final mode flag. As shown in FIG. 37(B), if the buffer number of the entry that was the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-0" or "2-0" and the variable display is not being executed, that is, if the timing of the start winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and the number of pending memories up to that point is 0, the timing at which the display mode of the pending memory display will change is determined to be 100% at the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing at which display starts as an active display).

In addition, if the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display performance is "1-1" or "2-1" and the variable display is in progress, that is, if the timing of the start winning occurs when the variable display is in progress and the number of pending memories up to that point is zero, the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending memory display is determined 50% to be the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing when the display starts as the first pending memory display), and 50% to be the timing of the shift to active display.

In addition, if the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-2" or "2-2", that is, if the number of pending memories up to that point at the time when the start winning occurs is one, the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending memory display is determined to be the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing when the display starts as the second pending memory display) 33% of the time, the timing of the shift as an active display is determined to be the timing of the shift as the first pending memory display 33% of the time.

In addition, if the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-3" or "2-3", that is, if the number of pending memories up to the time when the start winning occurs is two, the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending memory display is determined to be the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing when the display starts as the third pending memory display) 25% of the time, the shift timing as the active display is determined 25% of the time, the shift timing as the first pending memory display is determined 25% of the time, and the shift timing as the second pending memory display is determined 25% of the time.

If the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-4" or "2-4", that is, if the number of pending memories up to the time when the start winning occurs is three, the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending memory display is determined to be the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing when the display starts as the fourth pending memory display) 20% of the time, the shift timing as the active display is determined 20% of the time, the shift timing as the first pending memory display is determined 20% of the time, the shift timing as the second pending memory display is determined 20% of the time, and the shift timing as the third pending memory display is determined 20% of the time.

When the display mode change timing of the reserved memory display is determined as described above, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the determined change timing as the reserved display change timing flag of the entry that is the subject of the judgment of the reserved display performance. For example, if the display mode change timing of the reserved memory display is determined to be the shift timing as the active display, the reserved display change timing flag is set to "0", if the display mode change timing of the reserved memory display is determined to be the shift timing as the first reserved memory display, the reserved display change timing flag is set to "1", if the display mode change timing of the reserved memory display is determined to be the shift timing as the second reserved memory display, the reserved display change timing flag is set to "2", if the display mode change timing of the reserved memory display is determined to be the shift timing as the third reserved memory display, the reserved display change timing flag is set to "3", and if the display mode change timing of the reserved memory display is determined to be the shift timing as the fourth reserved memory display, the reserved display change timing flag is set to "4".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 refers to the start winning time received command buffer 003SG194A during the pending display update (step S161), and each time the memory contents of each entry are shifted, it determines whether it is time to change the display mode of the pending memory display from the value of the pending display change flag timing of each entry, and if it is not time to change the display mode of the pending memory display, it displays the pending memory display in a mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag, and if it is time to change the display mode of the pending memory display, it sets the value of the pending display final mode flag as the value of the pending display flag and then displays the pending memory display in a mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs and it is decided to execute the pending display effect based on the start winning, the timing of the change in the display state of the pending memory display is decided at an approximately constant rate according to the situation (i.e., the rate at which the pending memory display is controlled to the jackpot game state depending on the timing of the change in the pending memory display is approximately constant). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a start winning occurs and it is decided to execute the pending display effect based on the start winning, the rate at which the pending memory display is controlled to the jackpot game state may differ depending on the timing of the change in the display state of the pending memory display.

(Decorative pattern enlargement effect setting process at the start of variable display)
In the variable display start time decorative pattern enlargement performance setting process (step 003SGS307), the performance control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the change pattern of the variable display starting from the data read in step 003SGS305 or step 003SGS306, and determines whether or not to execute the variable display start time decorative pattern enlargement performance based on these variable display results and change patterns. As shown in Fig. 38, when the variable display result is a big hit, the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the variable display start time decorative pattern enlargement performance at a rate of 90% and to not execute the variable display start time decorative pattern enlargement performance at a rate of 10%. When the variable display result is a miss and the change pattern is a super reach (super reach miss), the performance determines to execute the variable display start time decorative pattern enlargement performance at a rate of 40% and to not execute the variable display start time decorative pattern enlargement performance at a rate of 60%.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the enlarged decorative pattern effect is executed at the start of the variable display, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set higher than when the enlarged decorative pattern effect is not executed at the start of the variable display, and when the enlarged decorative pattern effect is executed at the start of the variable display, the probability that a normal reach or super reach will be executed is set higher than when the enlarged decorative pattern effect is not executed at the start of the variable display.

When it is decided to execute the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of the variable display, and executes image display control on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc. based on the selected process table during the variable display effect processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the decorative pattern enlargement effect is not executed when the variable display starts during a variable display with a non-miss-at-all variable pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern enlargement effect may be executed when the variable display starts during a variable display with a non-miss-at-all variable pattern.

(Dialogue preview performance setting process)
In the line preview performance setting process (step 003SGS308), the performance control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the change pattern of the variable display starting from the data read in step 003SGS305 or step 003SGS306, and determines whether or not to execute the line preview performance and the lines to be displayed based on the variable display result and the change pattern. As shown in Fig. 39 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, it decides not to execute the line preview performance at a rate of 10%, decides to execute the first line preview performance at a rate of 60%, and decides to execute the second line preview performance at a rate of 30%. When the variable display result is a miss, it decides not to execute the line preview performance at a rate of 45%, decides to execute the first line preview performance at a rate of 20%, and decides to execute the second line preview performance at a rate of 35%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39(B), when it is decided to execute the first line preview performance, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or non-reach, the performance control CPU 120 decides to display line A with a probability of 90% and line B with a probability of 10%; and if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it decides to display line A with a probability of 20% and line B with a probability of 80%.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 39(C), when it is decided to execute the second line preview performance, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or non-reach, the performance control CPU 120 decides to display line C with a probability of 80% and line D with a probability of 20%; if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it decides to display line C with a probability of 30% and line D with a probability of 70%.

In other words, in this embodiment, the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state (the expectation of a jackpot) is set higher when the first line preview performance is executed than when the second line performance is executed. Also, since there is no normal reach jackpot variation pattern as a variation pattern in this embodiment, when the first line preview performance is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state (the expectation of a jackpot) is set higher when line B is displayed than when line A is displayed, and when the second line preview performance is executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state (the expectation of a jackpot) is set higher when line D is displayed than when line C is displayed.

When it is decided to execute the dialogue preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for the dialogue preview performance corresponding to the dialogue to be displayed, and in the variable display performance processing, based on the selected process table, executes image display control on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

(Weak Super Reach Title Performance Setting Processing)
When starting the variable display of the Super Reach variable pattern (PA2-2 to PA2-5, PA2-7, PA2-8, PA2-10, PA2-11, PA2-13, PA2-14, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-5, PB1-6, PB1-8, PB1-9, PB1-11, PB1-12) in a low base state, the performance control CPU 120 in the weak super reach title performance setting process (step 003SGS309) identifies the variable display result of the variable display starting from the data read out in step 003SGS306, and determines the performance pattern of the weak super reach title performance (the display color of the title displayed at the start of the weak super reach reach performance) based on these variable display results.

As shown in FIG. 40(A), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines in 50% of cases that the title displayed at the start of the Weak Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in white, and in 50% of cases that the title displayed at the start of the Weak Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in red. Also, when the variable display result is a miss, the performance control CPU 120 determines in 80% of cases that the title displayed at the start of the Weak Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in white, and in 20% of cases that the title displayed at the start of the Weak Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in red.

When the weak super reach title effect setting process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the weak super reach title effect corresponding to the determined title color of each reach effect, and in the variable display effect process, based on the selected process table, executes image display control on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

(Strong Super Reach Title Performance Setting Processing)
When starting the variable display of the strong super reach variable pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-19, PB1-2 to PB1-17), in the strong super reach title performance setting process (step 003SGS311), the performance control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result of the variable display that starts from the data read out in step 003SGS306, and determines the performance pattern of the strong super reach title performance (the display color of the title displayed at the start of the strong super reach reach performance) based on these variable display results.

As shown in FIG. 40(B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the title displayed at the start of the Strong Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in white with a probability of 30%, and that the title displayed at the start of the Strong Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in red with a probability of 70%. Also, when the variable display result is a miss, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the title displayed at the start of the Strong Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in white with a probability of 90%, and that the title displayed at the start of the Strong Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in red with a probability of 10%.

In other words, when the title is displayed in red at the start of a Weak Super Reach or a Strong Super Reach, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation rate) is set higher than when the title is displayed in white. Also, when the title is displayed in red at the start of a Strong Super Reach, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation rate) is set higher than when the title is displayed in red at the start of a Weak Super Reach.

When the strong super reach title presentation setting process is executed, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table for the strong super reach title presentation that corresponds to the title color of each reach presentation that has been determined, and in the variable display presentation process, based on the selected process table, performs image display control on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
When starting the variable display of the strong super reach variable pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-19, PB1-2 to PB1-17), in the strong super reach title performance setting process (step 003SGS311), the performance control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result of the variable display starting from the data read out in step 003SGS306, and determines whether or not to execute a cut-in performance and the performance pattern of the cut-in performance (the characters to be displayed in the cut-in performance) based on these variable display results.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in effect with a probability of 10%, decides to display the word "Hot!" as the cut-in effect with a probability of 20%, and decides to display the word "Super Hot!" as the cut-in effect with a probability of 70%. Also, when the variable display result is a miss, the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in effect with a probability of 60%, decides to display the word "Hot!" as the cut-in effect with a probability of 35%, and decides to display the word "Super Hot!" as the cut-in effect with a probability of 5%.

In other words, during the execution of the Strong Super Reach reach effect, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is set to be highest when the word "Super Hot!" is displayed as a cut-in effect, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is set to be lowest when the cut-in effect is not executed (jackpot expectation during the execution of a Strong Super Reach effect: "Super Hot!" display > "Hot!" display > no display (cut-in effect not executed)).

When it is decided to execute a cut-in effect in the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the cut-in effect according to the characters to be displayed as the cut-in effect, and in the variable display effect process, based on the selected process table, executes image display control on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

(Flow of the performance)
As described above, in this embodiment, the effects executed at the start of the variable display differ depending on the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result, and for some effects, the execution ratio differs depending on the variable display result.

Here, we will explain the execution order and timing of each performance in this embodiment using a variable display in a low base state as an example.

First, as shown in Fig. 105 (A1) to Fig. 105 (A3), if it is determined that a variable display start time decorative pattern enlargement effect is to be executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display start time decorative pattern enlargement effect is executed. After that, as shown in Fig. 105 (A4) to (A6), if it is determined that a dialogue preview effect (first dialogue preview effect or second dialogue preview effect) is to be executed at the start of the variable display, a dialogue preview effect including a preview button effect is executed.

Next, if the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern including the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance, the pseudo consecutive performance is executed as shown in Fig. 105 (A7) to Fig. 105 (A15) and Fig. 106 (A16) to Fig. 106 (A27). Note that in Fig. 105 (A7) to Fig. 105 (A15) and Fig. 106 (A16) to Fig. 106 (A27), the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once or twice, but the pseudo consecutive performance is executed up to three times depending on the variation pattern. Then, as shown in Fig. 106 (A28) to Fig. 106 (A31), after a maximum of three pseudo consecutive performances are executed, the left and right decorative symbols stop in a reach state, and a normal reach performance is executed. Note that, if the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the variable display is 0 to 2 times, the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination as a result of the normal reach performance, and the variable display ends.

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times in the variable display, the normal reach performance will transition to a weak super reach performance, as shown in Fig. 107 (A30) to Fig. 107 (A36). For the weak super reach performance, first, a weak super reach title performance is executed, as shown in Fig. 107 (A33) and Fig. 107 (A34). Also, if the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a strong super reach, a message is displayed indicating that the weak super reach performance will develop into a strong super reach performance (see Fig. 107 (A36)), and then a development performance is executed, as shown in Fig. 107 (A37) to Fig. 107 (A39).

When the variable display is a variable display based on a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach miss, although not shown in the figure, a weak super reach performance is displayed to indicate that it will not progress to a strong super reach performance (in the case of a weak super reach performance in this embodiment, an image in which at least one bowling pin is not knocked down is displayed instead of the image in which all bowling pins are knocked down in FIG. 107 (A38)), and then the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a miss.

After the development performance is executed, a strong super reach performance is executed as shown in Fig. 107 (A40) to Fig. 107 (A47) and Fig. 108 (A48) to Fig. 108 (A54). As a strong super reach performance, first, a strong super reach title performance is executed as shown in Fig. 107 (A40) and Fig. 107 (A41). Then, if it is decided to execute a cut-in performance at the start of the variable display, as the strong super reach performance progresses after the strong super reach title performance, a cut-in performance including a preview button performance is executed as shown in Fig. 107 (A45) to Fig. 107 (A47).

As the Strong Super Reach performance progresses further, the Decisive Button performance is executed as shown in FIG. 108 (A51). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B in the Decisive Button performance, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, a message is displayed indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot (in this embodiment, an image of an ally character defeating an enemy character as shown in FIG. 108 (A52) to FIG. 108 (A54)), and the movable body 32 is further operated. Then, after the Strong Super Reach performance, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is displayed as a symbol matching performance as shown in FIG. 108 (A54) to FIG. 108 (A57).

If the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B in the deciding button performance, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, a message is displayed indicating that the variable display result is a miss (in this embodiment, an image of the friendly character not defeating the enemy character and cracks appearing on the screen, as shown in Figures 108 (A58) to 108 (A61)), and a stop display with a losing combination of decorative patterns is executed, and the variable display ends.

Although not shown in Figs. 105 to 108, when the variable display result is a miss, a pattern stop expansion effect is executed for each decorative pattern, and in the jackpot game state or high base state controlled based on the variable display result being a jackpot, effects such as the first right hit display effect, the second right hit display effect, the fanfare effect, the V challenge effect, the V challenge success effect, the V winning effect, the reserved consecutive suggestion effect, the reserved consecutive notification effect, the first prize ball number notification effect, the second prize ball notification effect, and the ending effect are executed. Furthermore, in the low base state just transitioned from the high base state, the first left hit display effect is executed. Furthermore, when the game ball is hit into the right game area 2R in the low base state, the second left hit display effect is executed.

(Performance of each performance)
Next, the presentation mode of each presentation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described.

(Image enlargement effect when variable display starts)
First, when it is determined that the enlarged pattern effect is not executed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, as shown in Fig. 42(A) to Fig. 42(F) and Fig. 100(A) to Fig. 100(E), the decorative pattern displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed in that order. At this time, each decorative pattern is not enlarged in response to the start of the variable display. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the high-speed variable display of each decorative pattern is started. Note that the variable display of the decorative patterns shown in Fig. 42(A) to Fig. 42(F) and Fig. 43(A) to Fig. 43(G) is not executed when the variation pattern PA1-2 is determined. At the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns based on the variation pattern PA1-2, each decorative pattern starts scrolling display at the same time without changing the display size or displaying effects. In this way, the variable display of the decorative patterns can be started smoothly without taking extra time for the shortening variation.

When the variable display start pattern enlargement performance is not being performed, the decorative effect SE0 is displayed for the decorative pattern that starts variable display at the variable display start timing of each decorative pattern. Note that when the variable display start pattern enlargement performance is not being performed, it is also possible to display the enlargement effect for each decorative pattern that starts variable display, but as shown in Figures 100(A') to 100(E'), in order to ensure the visibility of the variable display of each decorative pattern, it is necessary to start the variable display of the decorative pattern from the timing after the display of the enlargement effect has ended. Therefore, if the enlargement effect is displayed for all the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center, it will take longer to complete the display of all the effects than if the decorative effect SE0 is displayed. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the variable display start pattern enlargement performance is not being performed, the decorative effect is displayed for the decorative pattern instead of the enlargement effect.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display pattern enlargement effect is to be performed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 43(A) to FIG. 43(F), the decorative pattern displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C are enlarged and displayed simultaneously. Also, when these decorative patterns are enlarged, a circular decorative effect SE1 (first effect in the present invention) is displayed for each decorative pattern. Then, when the display of the decorative effect SE1 for each decorative pattern ends, the variable display of each decorative pattern starts simultaneously. Note that the decorative effect SE1 is displayed so as to gradually enlarge after the display starts, but is hidden before it is overlapped with the reserved memory count, small patterns, and the second right-hit display MH2 described later.

(Expanded effect when the pattern stops)
When the decorative pattern stops, the pattern stop time enlargement effect is executed. As shown in Fig. 44 (A) to Fig. 44 (L) and Fig. 45 (M) and Fig. 45 (N), the pattern stop time enlargement effect is as follows: first, the decorative pattern (left pattern) stops in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L. At this time, the decorative pattern (left pattern) is enlarged and the decorative effect SE2 is displayed for the decorative pattern. Next, the decorative pattern (right pattern) stops in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. At this time, the decorative pattern (right pattern) is enlarged and the decorative effect SE2 is displayed for the decorative pattern. Then, the decorative pattern (middle pattern) stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, the decorative pattern (middle pattern) is enlarged and the decorative effect SE2 is displayed for the decorative pattern. When the display of the decorative effect SE2 targeting the "medium" decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5C ends, the variable display ends, and the active display corresponding to the variable display is erased in the active display area 5F. The decorative effect SE2 is displayed so as to gradually expand after the display starts, but is hidden before it is overlapped with the reserved memory number, small patterns, and the second right-hit display MH2 described later. The display period of the decorative effect SE2 is set shorter than the display period of the decorative effect SE1, so that the game can be appropriately livened up without excessively raising the player's expectations just before the variation ends.

In addition, Figures 44 and 45 show an example of a form in which the enlarged display of each decorative pattern and the display of a decorative effect are executed in response to the stopping of each decorative pattern in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, respectively. However, the above form is an enlargement performance when a pattern stops in a variable display in a non-reach or normal reach variable pattern, and as an enlargement performance when a pattern stops in a variable display in a super reach variable pattern, when a decorative pattern stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, the enlargement of the decorative pattern and the display of the decorative effect SE2 targeted at that decorative pattern are not executed.

In addition, in the enlargement effect when the symbols stop, as shown in Fig. 101(A)-Fig. 101(E) and Fig. 102(F), a form in which the decorative effect SE2 is displayed on the decorative symbols is exemplified. This is because, if an enlargement effect is displayed on the decorative symbols as shown in Fig. 101(A')-Fig. 101(E'), Fig. 102(F') and Fig. 102(G'), the high frequency of the execution of the enlargement effect when the symbols stop increases the player's expectations of being controlled into a jackpot game state. Furthermore, depending on the timing at which each decorative symbol stops, multiple enlargement effects are displayed simultaneously, reducing the visibility of the decorative symbols. To prevent this, if the enlargement effects for each decorative symbol are displayed so that their display periods do not overlap, the time required to complete the display of all the enlargement effects will be longer than when the decorative effects are displayed.

(First line preview, second line preview)
In the case where it is decided to execute the dialogue preview performance during the variable display, as shown in Fig. 46(A) to Fig. 46(F) and Fig. 47(A) to Fig. 47(F), during the variable display of the decorative pattern (or during the timing before the reach if the variable display is in the reach variation pattern), the preview button performance is executed as a part of the first dialogue preview performance or the second dialogue preview performance. As the preview button performance, the display of the light emitting effect HE1, which is a kind of decorative effect, is executed in the central part of the display area of the image display device 5 (approximately the same position as the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C). When a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the display of the light emitting effect HE1, the display of the operation prompting image SS1 (image of the push button 31B) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B is started, and the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is started. 46(E) and 47(E), at the start of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the light emitting effect HE1 is slightly displayed so as not to impair the visibility of the operation prompting image SS1. In this way, the start of the operation acceptance period can be properly indicated while enhancing the presentation effect by the light emitting effect HE1 and the operation prompting image SS1.

The operation prompting image SS1 in the preview button performance of this embodiment is displayed as an animation in which the image of the push button 31B repeatedly switches between a first display in which the image of the push button 31B protrudes and a second display in which the image of the push button 31B sinks during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (see Fig. 46(F), Fig. 46(G), Fig. 47(F), Fig. 47(G)). At this time, a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that protrudes due to the first display, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a second brightness higher than the first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that sinks due to the second display. Also, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, the animation ends and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect, is displayed together with the image of the sinking push button 31B (see Fig. 46(G), Fig. 47(G)).

If it has been decided that the first line preview effect will be performed, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, as shown in Figures 46(G) to 46(L), from the timing when the preview button effect ends, the character image CA1 will be moved from the top to the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the line images CG1A, CG1B will be moved from the left and right to the center of the display area of the image display device 5 according to the performance pattern. Then, when the movement of the character image CA1 and the line images CG1A, CG1B ends, the enlargement effect KE1 according to the line images CG1A, CG1B is displayed.

As shown in Figures 87 (B) and 95 (P), the first dialogue preview performance in this embodiment is a performance in which the enlargement effect KE1 targeted at the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B is enlarged and displayed so as to spread from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the outside of the display area. In particular, the enlargement effect KE1 is enlarged so that the movement distance in the left-right direction is greater than the up-down direction during the process of being enlarged, so that it does not overlap with display areas displaying game-related information such as the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, display area 5S, etc. by the time the display ends. In other words, the display period of the enlargement effect KE1 ends before it overlaps with any of the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the process of being enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 95 (P), when the first line preview performance is being performed in the high base state, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, but the enlargement effect KE1 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

In addition, if it has been decided that the second line preview effect will be performed, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, as shown in Figures 47(G) to 47(L), the character image CA2 is moved from the left side to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5 from the timing when the preview button effect ends. Then, when the movement of the character image CA2 ends (the character reaches the right side of the display area), the line image CG2 is displayed according to the performance pattern. Note that a decorative effect SE3 is displayed around the line image as a speech bubble surrounding the line image.

Note that Figures 46 and 47 show the first and second dialogue preview effects when the game state is in a low base state, but as shown in Figures 61 and 62, these first and second dialogue preview effects can also be executed during variable display when the game state is in a high base state.

In this embodiment, the line preview performance can be executed when the game state is in a low base state and when the game state is in a high base state, and Figures 46 and 47 show the line preview performance when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in Figures 61 and 62, the first line preview performance and the second line preview performance when the game state is in a high base state differ from those in the low base state in that the background image displayed is different and a second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, but the performance format is the same. In this embodiment, the presentation manner of the dialogue preview performance is the same in the low base state and the high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first dialogue preview performance may be executed in the low base state, and the second dialogue preview performance may be executed in the high base state. Alternatively, the first dialogue preview performance and the second dialogue preview performance may be executed in the low base state, and the third dialogue preview performance (with magnification effect, without decoration effect) in which a character different from that in the first dialogue preview performance appears, and the fourth dialogue preview performance (without magnification effect, with decoration effect) in which a character different from that in the second dialogue preview performance appears may be executed in the high base state.

As described above, the first and second dialogue preview performances in this embodiment are common in that they are performances in which a character and dialogue image are displayed on the image display device 5, but as shown in Figures 122(A) and 122(B), the first dialogue preview performance is a performance in which an enlargement effect KE1 imitating dialogue images CG1A and CG1B is displayed, and the second dialogue preview performance is a performance in which a decorative effect SE3 in a shape surrounding the dialogue image CG2 is displayed. Also, the display period of the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B in the first dialogue preview performance is 4 seconds, including the movement period (0.5 seconds) of the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, and the display period of the dialogue image CG2 in the second dialogue preview performance is 6 seconds from the timing at which the movement of the character image CA2 is completed. That is, in the first dialogue preview performance, by displaying the enlargement effect KE1 imitating the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B are likely to leave a lasting impression on the player even during a short display period. Also, the number of characters constituting the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B in the first dialogue preview performance is smaller than the number of characters constituting the dialogue image CG2 in the second dialogue preview performance. That is, in the first dialogue preview performance, by displaying the enlargement effect KE1 imitating each of the characters constituting the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B are likely to leave a lasting impression on the player even when they are composed of a small number of characters. Also, as shown in Figure 39, the presentation patterns for the first line preview presentation include a pattern in which an image of line A (line images CG1A, CG1B) is displayed and a pattern in which an image of line B is displayed. In both patterns, the display period for the line image is 4 seconds, including the movement period, and although the number of characters making up each line image differs between line A and line B, both have fewer characters than lines C and D. Additionally, regardless of whether the first line preview performance is executed in a pattern that displays line A or a pattern that displays line B, an enlargement effect that imitates the line image corresponding to each pattern is displayed, with the enlargement effect corresponding to the image of line A being displayed in a manner that imitates the entire image of line A (the line images CG1A and CG1B themselves), and the enlargement effect corresponding to the image of line B being displayed in a manner that imitates a portion of the image of line B (for example, only one of the multiple characters that make up line B, or only the outline of the image of line B).

(Pseudo consecutive performance)
When the pseudo consecutive performance is executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 48(A) to FIG. 48(J), first, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In this state, in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, the pseudo consecutive pattern is moved from the top to the center of the display area of the image display device 5. When the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, the pseudo consecutive pattern is enlarged and an enlargement effect KE2 is displayed for the pseudo consecutive pattern. Then, when the display of the enlargement effect KE2 for the enlargement of the pseudo consecutive pattern ends, the enlarged pseudo consecutive pattern is reduced. At this time, when the reduced display of the pseudo consecutive pattern ends, an enlargement effect KE3 is displayed for the reduced pseudo consecutive pattern. Although not shown, in FIG. 48(D), the vibration display of the pseudo consecutive pattern starts when the pseudo consecutive pattern is fully enlarged. As shown in the figure, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are fully enlarged, the display of the enlargement effect KE3 starts without being affected by the vibration display of the pseudo consecutive symbols. The vibration display of the pseudo consecutive symbols continues during the display period of the enlargement effect KE3, and ends after the display of the enlargement effect KE3 ends, before the pseudo consecutive symbols are reduced.

When the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display, as shown in Figures 49 (A) to 49 (D), the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, but in the "center" decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and decorative symbols corresponding to the combination that results in a miss stop. At this time, effects such as the decorative effect SE2 are not displayed to avoid excessive disappointment when the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 88(A), the pseudo consecutive performance in this embodiment is a performance in which the enlargement effects KE2 and KE3 targeted at the pseudo consecutive patterns are equally enlarged in the vertical and horizontal directions from the center of the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, these enlargement effects KE2 and KE3 are enlargement effects whose display period ends before they overlap with any of the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5F, or the display area 5S during the process of being enlarged. As will be described later, the display period of the enlargement effect KE2 and the display period of the enlargement effect KE3 are the same length, but the display period of the enlargement effect KE2 and KE3 are different from the display period of the enlargement effect KE1 (enlargement effect KE2, KE3>enlargement effect KE1). In the first dialogue preview performance, it is necessary for the player to read the multiple characters that make up the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B within a short period of time, so the display period of the enlargement effect KE1 is set shorter than the display period of the enlargement effects KE2 and KE3. Additionally, the magnification rate of the enlargement effect, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases differ between enlargement effect KE1 and enlargement effects KE2 and KE3 (enlargement effect KE1 > enlargement effect KE2 and KE3). In this way, the display period, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene being displayed even within the enlargement effect, so that the target image can be made to stand out effectively with a wide variety of enlargement effects.

(Normal reach effect)
When a normal reach performance is executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 50(A) to FIG. 50(L), first, the decorative symbols stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At this time, the enlarged display of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in these decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and the display of the enlarged effect KE4 targeting these decorative symbols are executed. Here, if the variable display is not a variable display in a normal reach miss variation pattern, the character base part of the decorative symbol becomes invisible, and the number part of the decorative symbol stopped in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L moves to the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, and the number part of the decorative symbol stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R moves to the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, when the number part of these decorative symbols reaches the upper left or upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, the display of the enlarged effect KE5 is executed targeting the number part of these decorative symbols. After that, the game moves to the reach effect of the super reach (weak super reach effect or strong super reach effect). Since the expansion effects KE4 and KE5 have different modes depending on the type of the target decorative pattern, the effect of the normal reach effect at the start of the normal reach effect can be appropriately enhanced by a wide variety of expansion effects according to the type of decorative pattern that has become the reach mode. In addition, the display period of the expansion effect KE4 and the display period of the expansion effect KE5 are different in length (expanding effect KE4>expanding effect KE5). Since the expansion effect KE4 is displayed when the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, by setting the display period to be longer, the normal reach effect can be appropriately indicated to the player that it is a chance to start. On the other hand, the display period of the expansion effect KE5 is set to be shorter, taking into consideration that each decorative pattern develops into the SP reach immediately after moving to the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different between the enlargement effect KE4 and the enlargement effect KE5 (enlargement effect KE5>enlargement effect KE4). When the variable display is a variable display in a normal reach failure variation pattern, in the scene of FIG. 50 (H), a different type of decorative pattern from the decorative patterns stopped in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R stops in the decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, the decorative effect and the enlargement effect targeted at the decorative pattern stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C are not displayed to avoid overemphasizing the failure of the normal reach performance, but this is not limited to this, and a decorative effect for reach failure with a lower degree of emphasis than the decorative effects associated with other performances may be displayed to moderately enhance the performance effect.

As shown in FIG. 88(B), the normal reach presentation in this embodiment is a presentation in which an enlargement effect KE4 targeting the left and right decorative symbols is enlarged in the vertical and horizontal directions from the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, the display period of these enlargement effects KE4 ends before they overlap with any of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the process of being enlarged.

Comparing the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect and the normal reach effect in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 124 (A) and Fig. 124 (B), both effects are effects that display decorative patterns and effects targeted at these decorative patterns, but the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect is an effect in which a circular decorative effect SE1 with a different shape from the decorative pattern is displayed, and the normal reach effect is an effect in which an enlarged effect KE4 with a shape similar to the decorative pattern is displayed. The display period of the enlarged effect KE4 is shorter than that of the decorative effect SE1, so that it is possible to effectively indicate to the player that it is a chance even in a short period of time. In addition, the development cost of the enlarged effect KE4 is lower than that of the decorative effect SE1. Specifically, the decorative effect SE1 requires preparation of dedicated material data and then processing the material data as appropriate, so it takes a certain amount of time to create it, whereas the enlarged effect KE4 can be created by reusing the material data of the decorative pattern, so it can be created in a short period of time.

In addition, comparing the enlarged effect when the symbol stops with the normal reach effect in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 126 (A) and Fig. 126 (B), both effects are effects that display decorative symbols and effects targeted at these decorative symbols, but the enlarged effect when the symbol stops is an effect that displays an elliptical decorative effect SE2 that is different in shape from the decorative symbols, and the normal reach effect is an effect that displays an enlarged effect KE4 that is similar in shape to the decorative symbols. The display period of the enlarged effect KE5 is shorter than that of the decorative effect SE2, so that it is possible to effectively indicate to the player that it is a chance even in a short period of time. In addition, the development cost of the enlarged effect KE5 is lower than that of the decorative effect SE2. Specifically, the decorative effect SE2 requires preparation of dedicated material data and then processing the material data as appropriate, so it takes a certain amount of time to create it, whereas the enlarged effect KE5 can be created by reusing the material data of the decorative symbols, so it can be created in a short period of time.

(Weak Super Reach Performance, Weak Super Reach Title Performance)
When a weak super reach effect is executed during variable display, first, as shown in Figures 51(A) to 51(G) and 51(E') to 51(G'), a title image of the weak super reach effect is displayed together with an initial image of the weak super reach effect as a weak super reach title effect on the image display device 5. As the title image of the weak super reach effect, either a white title image TG1 or a red title image TG1 is displayed, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on which is displayed.

After the appearance animation of the title image TG1 of the weak super reach performance is completed, the enlargement effect KE6 is displayed targeting the title image TG1 of the weak super reach performance. There are two types of enlargement effect KE6: a white enlargement effect KE6 targeting the white title image TG1 and a red enlargement effect KE6 targeting the red title image TG1. There is no difference in the display period or display pattern, but the type of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the display period of the enlargement effect KE6 and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 are different when the white enlargement effect KE6 is displayed and when the red enlargement effect KE6 is displayed. In this embodiment, the display pattern is the same between the white enlargement effect KE6 and the red enlargement effect KE6, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the red enlargement effect KE6 is displayed, for example, during the display period of the red title image TG1, the red enlargement effect KE6 may be displayed more frequently than the white enlargement effect KE6, or a decorative effect may be displayed in addition to the red enlargement effect KE6.

As shown in FIG. 89(E), the weak super reach title effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the enlargement effect KE6, which targets the title image TG1, is enlarged and displayed so as to spread downward and left and right in the display area of the image display device 5. The display of the enlargement effect KE6 starts from the same position as the title image TG1, and since the title image TG1 is an image displayed below the display area 5S in the display area of the image display device 5, the enlargement effect KE6 does not overlap with the display area 5S in the process of being enlarged. In addition, the enlargement effect KE6 is also an enlargement effect whose display period ends before it overlaps with either the special chart reserved memory display area 5U or the active display area 5F. In addition, unlike the enlargement effects KE1 to KE5, the enlargement effect KE6 is displayed multiple times during the display period of the title image TG1. In addition, when comparing the enlargement effect KE6 with the enlargement effect KE1, in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, the display period of the enlargement effect KE6 is longer than the display period of the enlargement effect KE1. This is because the display period of the title image TG1, which is the target of the enlargement effect KE6, is longer than the display period of the dialogue images CG1A, CG1B, which are the target of the enlargement effect KE1. Additionally, the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself enlarges, and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ between the enlargement effect KE1 and the enlargement effect KE6 (enlargement effect KE1 > enlargement effect KE6). In this way, the display period, number of times it is displayed, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene being displayed even within the enlargement effect, so that the target image can be made to stand out effectively with a wide variety of different ways of looking at the enlargement effect.

After the weak super reach title effect ends, as shown in FIG. 52(A) to FIG. 52(C), the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect image of the weak super reach effect (in this embodiment, the effect image of knocking down bowling pins). At this time, if the variable display is a variable display with a variable pattern of a weak super reach miss, as shown in FIG. 52(D) to FIG. 52(E), an image corresponding to the variable display result being a miss without progressing to a strong super reach effect (an effect image in which all bowling pins are not knocked down) is displayed, and the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, and the variable display ends. At this time, by not displaying the decorative effects and enlargement effects for the decorative symbols that stop in a miss combination, the failure of the weak super reach effect is not overly emphasized, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a decorative effect for a reach miss with a lower degree of emphasis than the decorative effects associated with other effects may be displayed to appropriately enhance the effect of ... On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display with a fluctuation pattern of a strong super reach miss or a strong super reach jackpot, an image corresponding to the development of the weak super reach effect into a strong super reach effect (the effect image in which all the bowling pins have fallen, as shown in Figure 53 (A)) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the weak super reach performance is exemplified as a form in which no enlargement or decorative effects are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and enlargement or decorative effects may be displayed on any of the images displayed in the weak super reach performance.

(Developmental performance)
When an image corresponding to the development of the weak super reach performance to a strong super reach performance is displayed as described above, a further development performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 53(A) to FIG. 53(G), after an image corresponding to the development of the weak super reach performance to a strong super reach performance is displayed, the character "development" is moved from the top to the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. When the character "development" stops at the center of the display area, a flame effect is first displayed as a decorative effect SE4 around the character "development", and then an enlargement effect KE8 targeting the character "development" is displayed. When the enlargement effect KE8 is compared with the enlargement effect KE1 in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is a character, the display period of the enlargement effect KE8 is longer than the display period of the enlargement effect KE1. This is because the display period of the title image TG1, which is the target of the enlargement effect KE8, is longer than the display period of the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, which are the target of the enlargement effect KE1. In addition, the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different between the enlargement effect KE1 and the enlargement effect KE8 (enlargement effect KE1>enlargement effect KE8). In addition, when comparing the enlargement effect KE8 with the enlargement effect KE6, which is a text-based image, the length of the display period and the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE6>enlargement effect KE8). In this way, the display period, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene displayed within the enlargement effect, so that the target image can be effectively made to stand out by using a wide variety of enlargement effects.

The decorative effect in the development performance is enlarged in accordance with the progress of the display of the enlargement effect KE8 (enlarged display), as shown in Figures 53(D) and 53(E). Then, as shown in Figures 53(F) and 53(G), the enlargement of the decorative effect SE4 continues even after the display of the enlargement effect has ended, and eventually the image of the weak super reach performance and the word "Development" are concealed by the decorative effect.

As shown in FIG. 89 (F), the development effect in this embodiment is an effect in which an enlargement effect KE8 targeting the word "development" is enlarged in the vertical and horizontal directions from the center of the image display device 5. The enlargement effect KE8 is also an enlargement effect whose display period ends before it overlaps with any of the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5F, or the display area 5S. On the other hand, the decorative effect SE4 in the development effect is a decorative effect displayed over a wider display area than the enlargement effect KE8, and is a decorative effect that overlaps with the decorative patterns displayed in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5F, the display area 5S, and the upper right corner of the display area.

(Strong Super Reach Title Production)
54(A) to 54(G) and 55(A) to 55(G), the strong super reach title effect starts with displaying the character image CA3 and the reach title image TG3 of the strong super reach effect according to the variation pattern in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the reach title image TG3 in the strong super reach title effect is displayed in white or red, and the proportion of the game state controlled to the big win state differs depending on which color the reach title image TG3 is displayed in.

The character image CA3 and the reach title image TG3 are gradually enlarged and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of display. When the character image CA3 and the reach title image TG3 reach a specified size and the enlargement ends, the enlargement effect KE9 is displayed on the enlarged reach title image TG3, and the display of the decorative effect SE5 also starts around the reach title image TG3 from a timing after the start of the display of the enlargement effect KE9. When the display of the enlargement effect KE9 and the decorative effect SE5 ends, a battle performance in which the ally character and the enemy character fight as a strong super reach performance according to the variation pattern starts (see FIG. 54 (G)). Note that the type of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the display period of the enlargement effect KE9 and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 are different when the white enlargement effect KE9 is displayed and when the red enlargement effect KE9 is displayed. Moreover, unlike the enlargement effects KE1 to KE5 and KE8, the enlargement effect KE9 is displayed multiple times during the display period of the reach title image TG3. When comparing the enlargement effect KE9 with the enlargement effect KE1, in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, the display period of the enlargement effect KE9 is longer than that of the enlargement effect KE1. This is because the display period of the reach title image TG3 targeted by the enlargement effect KE9 is longer than the display period of the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B targeted by the enlargement effect KE1. The enlargement rate of the enlargement effect, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different between the enlargement effect KE1 and the enlargement effect KE9 (enlargement effect KE1>enlargement effect KE9). When comparing the enlargement effect KE9 with the enlargement effect KE6, in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE9>enlargement effect KE6). Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effect KE9 with enlargement effect KE8, in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, not only are the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect different, but the speed at which the enlargement effect itself enlarges and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ (enlargement effect KE9 > enlargement effect KE8). In this way, because the display period, number of times it is displayed, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene being displayed even within the enlargement effect, it is possible to effectively make the target image stand out using a wide variety of enlargement effects.

In this embodiment, the strong super reach title presentation can be executed when the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, and Figures 54 and 55 show the strong super reach title presentation when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in Figures 64 and 65, when the game state is in a high base state, the strong super reach title presentation is different in that a second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, but the presentation format is the same.

In the strong super reach title performance in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 54 (C) to 54 (E) and 55 (C) to 55 (E), the form of the decorative effect SE5 is the same regardless of the color of the letters in the reach title image TG3, that is, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state (expected jackpot), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the form of the decorative effect SE5 may be different depending on the color of the letters in the reach title image TG3. In this way, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state can be more clearly shown to the player in addition to the color of the letters in the reach title image TG3. In addition, in the strong super reach title performance in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 54 (C) to 54 (E) and 55 (C) to 55 (E), the form of the enlarged effect KE9 targeting the reach title image TG3 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an enlarged effect targeting the character image CA3 may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 90(G) and FIG. 96(R), the strong super reach title effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the reach title image TG3 is targeted and the enlarged effect KE9 is enlarged so as to spread upward and left and right in the display area of the image display device 5. The display of the enlarged effect KE9 starts from the same position as the reach title image TG3, and since the reach title image TG3 is an image displayed below the display area 5S in the display area of the image display device 5, the enlarged effect KE9 does not overlap with the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F in the process of being enlarged. In addition, the enlarged effect KE9 is enlarged so as not to overlap with the display area 5S and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display area during the first period of the display period, and is an enlarged effect that overlaps with the display area 5S and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display area during the second period after the first period has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 96 (R), when a strong super reach title performance is being executed in a high base state, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and therefore the enlargement effect KE9 expands during the enlargement process so as not to overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 over the first period of the display period, and is also an enlargement effect that overlaps with the second right-hit display MH2 over the second period after the first period has elapsed.

In the strong super reach title presentation in this embodiment, the image display device 5 displays the character image CA3, reach title image TG3, decorative effect SE5, and enlarged effect KE9 in common whether the reach title image TG3 is displayed in white or red, but as shown in Figures 123(A) and 123(B), the difference is that the enlarged effect KE9 is displayed in a color corresponding to the display color (white, red) of the reach title image TG3. In other words, when the reach title image TG3 is displayed in white, the enlarged effect KE9 targeting the reach title image TG3 is displayed in white, and when the reach title image TG3 is displayed in red, the enlarged effect KE9 targeting the reach title image TG3 is displayed in red.

(Cut-in effect)
As shown in Fig. 56(A) to Fig. 56(J), Fig. 57(A) to Fig. 57(J), Fig. 96(S), and Fig. 97(T), the notice button effect is executed first as the cut-in effect. As the notice button effect, a light-emitting effect HE1, which is a kind of decorative effect, is displayed in the center part of the display area of the image display device 5 (approximately the same position as the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C). When a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the display of the light-emitting effect HE1, the display of an operation prompting image SS1 (image of the push button 31B) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B starts, and the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B begins. Note that the notice button effect is an effect accompanied by an animation in which the light-emitting effect HE1 and the image of the push button 31B described later are repeatedly switched between a first display in which the image protrudes and a second display in which the image sinks, as in Fig. 46(B) to Fig. 46(G) and Fig. 47(B) to Fig. 47(G).

The operation prompting image SS1 in the preview button performance of this embodiment is displayed as an animation in which the image of the push button 31B repeatedly switches between a first display in which the image of the push button 31B protrudes and a second display in which the image of the push button 31B sinks, as shown in Figs. 56(F), 56(G), 57(F), and 57(G), during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. At this time, a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light with a first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that protrudes due to the first display, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light with a second brightness higher than the first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that sinks due to the second display. Although not shown, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, the animation ends, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect (see Figs. 46(G) and 47(G)), is displayed together with the image of the sinking push button 31B in the scenes of Figs. 56(H) and 57(H).

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, the preview button effect ends and the image KG1, KG2 (the characters "Hot!!" or "Super Hot!!") corresponding to the presentation pattern is displayed as a cut-in effect. At this time, the enlargement effects KE10, KE11 are displayed on the images KG1, K2 corresponding to the presentation pattern. Note that the timing at which the enlargement effect starts to be displayed is the scene in FIG. 56(I) and FIG. 57(I) after the fragment effect in FIG. 56(H) and FIG. 57(H) has become hidden, so the enlargement effects KE10, KE11 are not displayed mixed with the fragment effect, enhancing the presentation effects of both. Additionally, the display period for images KG1 and KG2 is 4 seconds from when the player operates push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of push button 31B or after the operation acceptance period of push button 31B ends, the display period for the fragment effect is 1 second, and the display period for enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 is 1 second.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect can be performed when the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, and Figures 56 and 57 show the cut-in effect when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in Figure 66, the cut-in effect when the game state is in a high base state is different in that a second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, but the presentation is the same. Although not shown, the cut-in effect in the high base state is also executed when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), FIG. 91 (I), FIG. 96 (S), and FIG. 97 (T), the cut-in effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 targeted at the images KG1 and KG2 according to the effect pattern are enlarged and displayed in the vertical and horizontal directions from the center of the image display device 5. The enlargement effect KE10 is displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, but is also an enlargement effect whose display period ends before it is displayed overlapping with any of the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5F, and the display area 5S. On the other hand, the enlargement effect KE11 is displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, and is ultimately displayed as an image larger than the enlargement effect KE10 (the enlargement effect KE11 is an image with a larger magnification ratio than the enlargement effect KE10), and is ultimately displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern displayed in the active display area 5F, the display area 5S, and the upper right part of the display area. Furthermore, the enlargement effect KE11 is also an enlargement effect that is displayed overlapping with the second right-hit display MH2 displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 when the game state is in a high base state. The type of sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R during the display period of the enlargement effects KE10, KE11 and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 are different when the enlargement effect KE10 is displayed and when the enlargement effect KE11 is displayed. In addition, when the enlargement effects KE10, KE11 are compared with the enlargement effect KE1, in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is a character, the length of the display period and the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different between the enlargement effects KE1, KE10, and KE11 (enlargement effect KE1>enlargement effect KE11>enlargement effect KE10). In addition, when comparing the enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 with the enlargement effect KE6, whose target image is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE11>enlargement effect KE6>enlargement effect KE10). In addition, when comparing the enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 with the enlargement effect KE8, whose target image is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE11>enlargement effect KE10>enlargement effect KE8). In addition, when comparing the enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 with the enlargement effect KE9, whose target image is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE11>enlargement effect KE9>enlargement effect KE10). In this way, the display period, enlargement speed, and transparency speed of the enlargement effect vary depending on the scene being displayed, making it possible to effectively highlight the target image using a wide variety of enlargement effects.

(Decisive button effect)
At the end of the strong super reach effect, a deciding button effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 58(A) to FIG. 58(H), the deciding button effect is executed by displaying an operation prompting image SS2 (image of the push button 31B) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B and a light emitting effect HE2 targeting the operation prompting image SS2 in the central part of the display area of the image display device 5. More specifically, in the deciding button effect, the light emitting effect HE2 is first displayed, and the operation prompting image SS2 is displayed while the light emitting effect HE2 is being displayed. The light emitting effect HE2 in the deciding button effect emits light with a higher brightness (strong light emission) than the light emitting effect HE1 in the above-mentioned notice button effect. The display period (4 seconds) during which the operation prompting image SS2 and the light emitting effect HE2 are displayed is set to be longer than the display period (2 seconds) during which the operation prompting image SS1 and the light emitting effect HE1 are displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 58 (G) and 58 (H), the operation prompting image SS2 in the deciding button performance of this embodiment is displayed as an animation in which the image of the push button 31B repeatedly switches between a first display in which the image of the push button 31B protrudes and a second display in which the image of the push button 31B is recessed during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. At this time, a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that protrudes due to the first display, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a second brightness higher than the first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that is recessed due to the second display. The animation of the operation prompting image SS2 is the same as that of Figures 46 (E), 46 (F), 47 (E), 47 (F), 56 (F), 56 (G), 57 (F), and 57 (G). In this way, while the appearance before the operation prompting image is displayed is significantly different between the preview button effect and the final button effect, after the operation prompting image is displayed, the operation prompting image is displayed using a common animation, so it is possible to appropriately prompt the player to operate the push button 31B while changing the impression given to the player. Note that the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B in the final button effect (6 seconds) is set longer than the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B in the preview button effect (3 seconds).

In this embodiment, the deciding button presentation can be executed when the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, and FIG. 58 shows the deciding button presentation when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in FIG. 67, the deciding button presentation when the game state is in a high base state differs in that a second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, but the presentation is the same.

Then, during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the player operates the push button 31B, or the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends. At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a performance image indicating a jackpot, such as an ally character defeating an enemy character, is displayed as the performance result of the strong super reach performance, although this is not shown in particular.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figures 60(A) to 60(D), a performance image indicating a miss, such as an image with reduced brightness of the image immediately before the start of the deciding button performance, is displayed as the performance result of the strong super reach performance, and decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a reach miss. Also, at this time, a crack image HB1 is displayed as a decorative effect in this invention, targeting the performance image indicating a miss (see Figures 60(A) and 60(B)).

(Pattern matching effect)
When the variable display result is a jackpot, after the end of the reach effect, a pattern matching effect is executed as a jackpot notification effect. As shown in Fig. 59(A) to Fig. 59(I), the pattern matching effect is executed by first enlarging the decorative patterns displayed in the combination of a jackpot, such as "666" or "777", in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. During the enlarged display of these decorative patterns, a spiral decorative effect SE6 is displayed behind the decorative patterns (see Fig. 59(A) to Fig. 59(C)). Then, as shown in Fig. 59(C) to Fig. 59(I), after the decorative patterns are enlarged to a predetermined size, the decorative patterns are reduced to their normal size (the size displayed during the variable display). Note that, from the timing when the reduced display of these decorative patterns is completed, the enlargement effect KE12 is displayed for each decorative pattern. Also, although not shown, in the scene of Fig. 59(C), the decorative effect with the image of electricity is displayed so as to wrap around the enlarged decorative pattern, and when the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the decorative effect with the image of electricity is hidden, and the display of the enlarged effect KE12 is executed. Also, although not shown, in the scene of Fig. 59(I), on the surface of each decorative pattern displayed in the combination of the big win, a decorative effect is displayed as an animation in which light is repeatedly moved from the lower left direction to the upper right direction over time. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed in the combination of the big win when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B in the deciding button performance, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B in the deciding button performance, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, the movable body 32 may be operated toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5 and stopped for a predetermined period. In this case, the background and decorative effect SE6 shown in Figures 59(A) to 59(C) are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 that is shielded by the movable body 32. When a predetermined period has elapsed, a return operation is started to return the movable body 32 to a predetermined position (origin position), and the scene in Figure 59(A) starts while the return operation of the movable body 32 is being performed, and when the scene in Figure 59(B) starts, the movable body 32 stops at the origin position. In this way, the enlarged display of the decorative pattern and the display of the enlarged effect KE12 are not shielded by the movable body 32, and the movable body 32 can appropriately notify the player that a jackpot has been won.

In this embodiment, the pattern matching effect can be executed when the game state is in a low base state and when the game state is in a high base state, and FIG. 59 shows the pattern matching effect when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in FIG. 68, the pattern matching effect when the game state is in a high base state is different in that the display mode of the decorative pattern is different, and the second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, which instructs the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and since the mode of the displayed decorative pattern is different between the low base state and the high base state, the displayed enlargement effect is different (enlargement effect SE12' is displayed), and although not shown, the type of decorative effect displayed to wrap around the enlarged decorative pattern in the scene of FIG. 68 (C) is different (a decorative effect with a flame image is displayed). On the other hand, the types of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, and the decorative effect as an animation of light repeatedly moving from the lower left to the upper right over time displayed on the surface of each decorative pattern displayed in the big win combination in the scenes of Figures 59 (I) and 68 (I), which are not shown, are common to the pattern matching performance in the low base state and the pattern matching performance in the high base state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of decorative effect SE6 in the pattern matching performance may be different between the low base state and the high base state.

As shown in Fig. 91(J) and Fig. 97(U), the symbol matching effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the enlargement effect KE12 for the left, right, and center decorative symbols (the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) displayed in a combination indicating a big win is enlarged in the vertical and horizontal directions. Of these enlargement effects KE12, the enlargement effect KE12 for the left decorative symbol (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L) is an enlargement effect that, in the process of being enlarged, does not overlap with the display area 5S over the first period of the display period, and overlaps with the display area 5S over the second period after the first period has elapsed. In addition, the enlargement effect KE12 for the center decorative pattern (the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C) is an enlargement effect that, as it is enlarged, is enlarged so as not to overlap with the active display area 5F and the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U during the first period of the display period, and is an enlargement effect that is overlapped with the active display area 5F and the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U during the second period after the first period has elapsed, and the enlargement effect KE12 for the right decorative pattern (the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R) is an enlargement effect that is overlapped with the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U during the enlargement.

When the game state is in a high base state, the enlargement effect KE12' for the right decorative pattern (the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R) is enlarged so as not to overlap with the display area 5S during the first period of the display period, and is also an enlargement effect that overlaps with the display area 5S displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 during the second period after the first period has elapsed. Also, the enlargement effect KE12' for the left decorative pattern (the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L) is enlarged so as not to overlap with the second right hit display MH2 displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 during the first period of the display period, and is also an enlargement effect that overlaps with the second right hit display MH2 during the second period after the first period has elapsed.

Comparing the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of variable display and the pattern matching effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 (A) and 125 (B), both effects display decorative patterns and display effects targeted at these decorative patterns, but the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of variable display is an effect in which a circular decorative effect SE1 that is different in shape from the decorative pattern is displayed, and the pattern matching effect is an effect in which an enlarged effect KE12 that is similar in shape to the decorative pattern is displayed.

In addition, when comparing the pattern stop expansion effect and the pattern matching effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 127 (A) and 127 (B), both effects display decorative patterns and display effects targeted at these decorative patterns, but the pattern stop expansion effect displays an elliptical decorative effect SE2 that is different in shape from the decorative patterns, and the pattern matching effect displays an expansion effect KE12 that is similar in shape to the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, comparing the normal reach effect and the pattern matching effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 128 (A) and 128 (B), both effects display decorative patterns and display effects targeting these decorative patterns, but the normal reach effect targets the left and right decorative patterns (two decorative patterns) and displays an enlarged effect KE4 that imitates these left and right decorative patterns, while the pattern matching effect targets the left, right, and center decorative patterns (three decorative patterns) and ultimately displays an enlarged effect KE12 that imitates these left and right decorative patterns larger than the enlarged effect KE4 in the normal reach effect (magnification ratio of the enlarged effect: enlarged effect KE12 > enlarged effect KE4).

The pattern matching effect in this embodiment is the same as the normal reach effect shown in Figure 50 in that it is an effect that displays an enlargement effect on decorative patterns, but it differs in that the pattern matching effect displays an enlargement effect on three decorative patterns on the left, right, and center, while the normal reach effect displays an enlargement effect on two decorative patterns on the left and right, and also in that the final enlargement effect is displayed larger in the pattern matching effect than in the normal reach effect, as well as the length of the display period, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases. In other words, the pattern matching effect and the normal reach effect are effects in which the display patterns of the enlargement effect are different.

(Reach suggestion performance)
In the variable display when the game state is in the high base state, instead of the pseudo consecutive performance, a reach suggestion performance that suggests a reach may be performed may be performed. As the reach suggestion performance, as shown in Figures 63(A) to 63(E), first, the character CA4 is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the character CA4 acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, causing a crack HB2 to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, if the variable display is a variable display based on a normal reach or super reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 63(F) and 63(G), a fragment effect is displayed by the action of the character CA4, and the left and right decorative patterns stop in a reach mode, and thereafter a reach performance based on the variation pattern is performed. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on a non-reach fluctuation pattern, different patterns stop as decorative patterns on the left and right, as shown in Figures 63(F') and 63(G'), and thereafter the decorative patterns stop in a non-reach combination, and the variable display ends.

(Fanfare performance)
After the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, first, a fanfare effect is executed to notify that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display in the low base state, that is, when the variable display result of the first special pattern becomes a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 69(A) to FIG. 69(I), the characters constituting the display indicating that it is a 6-round jackpot (the display of the jackpot title image BG1 of "BIG BONUS!!" shown in FIG. 69(C) to FIG. 69(I)) are sequentially moved and displayed from the right side of the display area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. As the characters constituting the jackpot title image BG1 are sequentially displayed, the display mode of the decoration effect in the center of the display area shown in FIG. 69(B) changes. Then, when all the characters have been moved, the display of the decorative effect ends, and the enlarged effect KE13 is displayed on the display indicating that it is a 6-round jackpot (jackpot title image BG1). Also, although not shown, in the scene of Fig. 69 (I), a decorative effect is displayed on the surface of the jackpot title image BG1 as an animation in which light is repeatedly moved over time at a predetermined cycle (1 second) from the "B" in "BIG BONUS!!" to the "!".

On the other hand, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display in the high base state, that is, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the fanfare effect is as follows: as shown in Figures 70(A) to 70(I), the characters constituting the display indicating a 10-round jackpot (the display of the jackpot title image BG2 of "SPECIAL BONUS!!" shown in Figures 70(C) to 70(I)) are displayed in sequence from the right of the display area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. As the characters constituting the jackpot title image BG2 are displayed in sequence, the display mode of the decorative effect in the center of the display area shown in Figure 70(B) changes. Then, when the moving display of all the characters is completed, the display of the decorative effect ends, and an enlarged effect KE14 is displayed targeting the display indicating a 10-round jackpot (jackpot title image BG2). The decorative effects shown in Figures 70(B) to 70(G) are images common to the decorative effects shown in Figures 69(B) to 69(G). Also, although not shown, in the scene in Figure 70(I), a decorative effect is displayed on the surface of the jackpot title image BG1 as an animation in which light moves repeatedly over time at a predetermined cycle (1 second) from the "S" in "SPECIAL BONUS!!" to the "!".

As shown in Figures 69 and 70, the fanfare effect in this embodiment is always executed in a state where the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, regardless of whether the jackpot game state is controlled based on the variable display of the low base state or the high base state. The second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 for 1 to 2 frames without animation or decorative effects such as moving display from outside the display area of the image display device 5, and after the display is completed, it is displayed with the decorative effect SE7C described later. In addition, the type of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the display period of the enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 are output and lighting controlled based on common control data. Moreover, when comparing the enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with the enlargement effect KE1, which has text as the target image of the enlargement effect, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself enlarges and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different between the enlargement effects KE1 and KE13 and KE14 (enlargement effect KE1>enlargement effect KE13=enlargement effect KE14). Moreover, when comparing the enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with the enlargement effect KE6, which has text as the target image of the enlargement effect, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself enlarges and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE6>enlargement effect KE13=enlargement effect KE14). In addition, when comparing the enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with the enlargement effect KE8, whose target image is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14 > enlargement effect KE8). In addition, when comparing the enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with the enlargement effect KE9, whose target image is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE9 > enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14). In addition, when comparing the enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with the enlargement effect KE10, whose target image is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14 > enlargement effect KE10). Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with enlargement effect KE11, in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, not only are the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect different, but the speed at which the enlargement effect itself enlarges and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ (enlargement effect KE11 > enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14). In this way, because the display period, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene being displayed even within the enlargement effect, the target image can be made to stand out effectively through a wide variety of different ways of looking at the enlargement effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 92 (K), when the variable display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot, the fanfare effect is an effect in which the enlargement effect KE13 targeting the jackpot title image BG1 is enlarged vertically and horizontally. When the fanfare effect is executed, the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE13 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S during the display period.

(First right-hit display effect, second right-hit display effect)
After the fanfare effect is performed in the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", the first right-hit display effect is executed. As the first right-hit display effect, as shown in FIG. 71(A) to FIG. 71(F), first, in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, an image of a right-pointing arrow and an image such as "right-hit!" that instructs the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R are displayed as the first right-hit display MH1 in this embodiment. Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71(B) to FIG. 71(D), the first right-hit display MH1 is an image that is displayed so as to move from the front side to the back side of the display area of the image display device 5 (moving and displayed so as to frame in), and when the moving display ends, the vibration display of the right-pointing arrow RY1 that constitutes the first right-hit display MH1 is executed. At this time, the decorative effect SE7A in the shape of the right-pointing arrow RY1 is repeatedly displayed so as to follow the vibration display of the right-pointing arrow RY1, overlapping with a part of it. Furthermore, after the fanfare effect is executed in the jackpot game state of "jackpot C" or "jackpot D" described later, the first right-hit display effect is executed, in which the displays of Figures 71 (A) to 71 (D) are omitted.

Furthermore, after the vibration display of the right-facing arrow RY1 constituting the first right-hit display MH1 ends, a decorative effect SE7B is displayed targeting the first right-hit display MH1. After the first right-hit display performance ends, an image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 instructing the player to place the game ball in the second large winning slot.

In the first right-hit display presentation, as shown in Figures 103(A) to 103(E), 104(F), and 104(G), a form is exemplified in which the decorative effect SE7B is displayed on the first right-hit display MH1. This is because, if an enlarged effect were displayed on the first right-hit display MH1 as shown in Figures 103(A') to 103(E') and 104(F') to 104(H'), the display range of the enlarged effect would overlap with the first right-hit display MH1, reducing the visibility of the first right-hit display MH1, and the decorative effect SE7B would be displayed for a longer period of time than if it were displayed, making it impossible to instruct the preferred player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R.

During the execution of the first right-hit display performance in this embodiment, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 as the second right-hit display performance. This second right-hit display MH2 is designed to start displaying without displaying a decorative effect such as the decorative effect SE7B of the first right-hit display MH1 when it is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display of the low base state (at the start of the fanfare performance). Also, the second right-hit display MH2 is composed of the characters "Right hit" and a right-facing arrow RY2, just like the first right-hit display MH1. Of these characters "Right hit" and the right-facing arrow RY2, the characters "Right hit" are displayed as a still image whose display form does not change over time, while the right-facing arrow YR2 displays a decorative effect SE7C as an animation in which light moves repeatedly to the right over time at a predetermined cycle (3 seconds). Furthermore, the decorative effect SE7C is always displayed together with the second right-hit display MH2 during the period when the high base state is controlled, not just when the first right-hit display performance is being performed.

(V challenge performance, V challenge success performance)
When the game is controlled to a big win game state based on the variable display of the low base state, that is, when the game is controlled to a big win game state based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the V challenge performance is executed during the big win game state. Note that, although the V challenge performance in this embodiment is a performance executed in the fourth round, the present invention is not limited to this, and the c challenge performance may be executed during any round before the round in which the second big prize winning port can be opened.

As shown in Fig. 72(A) to Fig. 72(C), the V Challenge performance starts with the gauge G being displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and then a message image MG1 (an image showing "Press the button repeatedly to collect gauge G!" in Fig. 72(A)) is displayed in the center of the display area, urging the user to update the gauge G by operating the push button 31B. Next, the enlargement effect KE15 is displayed on the message image MG1. When comparing the enlargement effect KE15 with the enlargement effects KE1, KE6, KE8, KE9, KE10, KE11, KE13, and KE14, in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases are also different. In this way, the display period, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene displayed within the enlargement effect, so that the target image can be made to stand out effectively by using a wide variety of enlargement effects.

When the display of the enlargement effect KE15 targeting the message image MG1 ends, as shown in FIG. 72(D) to FIG. 72(H) and FIG. 73(I), the display of the operation prompting image SS3 (image of the push button 31B) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B starts instead of the message image MG1. After that, during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the update display of the gauge G (display in which the gauge G accumulates from the bottom to the top) is executed according to the predetermined number of operations of the push button 31B by the player and the passage of time. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72(D) to FIG. 72(F), the operation prompting image SS3 that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B and the light-emitting effect targeting the operation prompting image SS3 are displayed in the center part of the display area of the image display device 5. More specifically, in the V challenge performance, the display of the light-emitting effect starts first, and the display of the operation prompting image SS3 starts while the light-emitting effect is being displayed. That is, it is executed in the same display pattern as when the operation prompting image SS2 in the deciding button performance is displayed. In addition, when the operation prompting image SS3 is displayed, the type of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 are controlled based on the same control data as when the operation prompting image SS2 in the deciding button performance is displayed.

If the jackpot game being played is a jackpot B jackpot game, then as shown in Figures 73(I) to 73(L), the gauge G is finally displayed in its final state (where the gauge G is filled up to the top (full)), and the V Challenge success presentation is executed. As the V Challenge presentation, the enlargement effect KH16 and the decorative effect SE8 targeted at the gauge G that has changed to its final state are simultaneously displayed, and then a message is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 indicating that the second large prize opening will be opened (the "Challenge Successful!!" message shown in Figure 73(K)).

On the other hand, if the jackpot game being played is the jackpot game of jackpot A, as shown in Figures 73(J') to 73(L'), the gauge G will not be displayed in its final state, and a message will be displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 indicating that the opening control of the second large prize opening has not been executed (the message "Failed..." shown in Figure 73(L')).

As shown in FIG. 92(L), when the variable display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot, the fanfare effect is an effect in which the enlargement effect KE13 targeting the jackpot title image BG1 is enlarged vertically and horizontally. When the fanfare effect is executed, the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE13 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S during the display period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 92 (L), the V Challenge suggestion effect is an effect in which an enlargement effect targeting the message image MG1 is enlarged vertically and horizontally. When the V Challenge suggestion effect is being executed, the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are not displayed, so the enlargement effect KE15 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the display period. Also, when the V Challenge suggestion effect is being executed, the second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, but the enlargement effect KE15 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 93(M), the V Challenge notification effect is an effect in which a decorative effect SE8 is displayed on the gauge G, and an enlargement effect KE16 is enlarged in the vertical and horizontal directions on the gauge G. When the V Challenge notification effect is being performed, the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5F, and the display area 5S are not displayed, so the enlargement effect KE16 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5F, or the display area 5S during the display period. Also, when the V Challenge notification effect is being performed, the second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, but the enlargement effect KE16 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

(Performance when winning the V award)
After the V challenge success performance is executed during the jackpot game, the game ball enters the second large prize winning hole in the sixth round during the jackpot game, that is, the V prize winning performance is executed. First, when the above-mentioned V challenge success performance ends, in the fifth round of the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the opening control of the second large prize winning hole will be executed in the next sixth round (display of "Aim for V in the next round!" shown in FIG. 74(A)). Next, when the sixth round of the jackpot game starts, first, the image display device 5 displays a message urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the second large prize winning hole for which the opening control is being executed (display of "Aim for V!" shown in FIG. 74(B)). In this state, when the game ball enters the second large prize winning hole during the sixth round, the image display device 5 displays the letter "V" V1 in response to the game ball entering the second large prize winning hole. Specifically, as shown in Figures 74(C) to 74(G), first, the letter "V" V1 starts to be displayed large across the entire display area of the image display device 5, and is gradually reduced in size toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, when the letter "V" V1 is reduced in size to a certain size, an enlargement effect KE17 is displayed with the letter "V" V1 as the target.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 93 (N), the V winning performance is a performance in which the enlargement effect KE17 is enlarged vertically and horizontally with the letter "V" V1 as the target. When the V winning performance is being executed, the special chart pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE17 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of the special chart pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S during the display period. Also, when the V winning performance is being executed, the second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, but the enlargement effect KE17 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right hit display MH2 during the enlargement process.

(Ending performance)
When a jackpot is hit in the low base state or the high base state and the controlled jackpot game ends, an ending performance is executed during the operation period of the jackpot end display timer. As the ending performance, as shown in Fig. 75(A) to Fig. 75(F), a game status notification image YH1 indicating the controlled game status such as the characters "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!" is displayed on the image display device 5. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 75(B) to Fig. 75(E), the game status notification image YH1 such as "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!" starts to be displayed large in the entire display area of the image display device 5, and is gradually reduced toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, when the game status notification image YH1 is reduced to a certain size, an enlargement effect KE18 is displayed on the game status notification image YH1. In addition, after the ending performance ends, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable display of the second special pattern while the background image corresponding to the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the game state notification image YH1 is displayed on the image display device 5 upon the end of any of the big win games of "Big Win A", "Big Win B", "Big Win C", and "Big Win D" described later, but it is not limited to this, and when the big win games of "Big Win B", "Big Win C", and "Big Win D" end, the characters "BATTLE RUSH ENTER!!" and the enlarged effect KE18 may be displayed, and when the big win game of "Big Win A" ends, the characters "CHANCE TIME ENTER!!" and the decorative effect may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (O), the ending performance is a performance in which the enlargement effect KE18 is enlarged vertically and horizontally on the game status notification image YH1. When the ending performance is being performed, the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE18 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the display period. Also, when the ending performance is being performed, the second right hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, but the enlargement effect KE18 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

(First left hit display)
When a specific number of variable displays (100 in this embodiment) are executed in the high base state without being controlled to the big win game state, the first left-hit display performance is executed. First, as shown in FIG. 76(A) to FIG. 76(F), when a specific number of variable displays are executed in the high base state without being controlled to the big win game state, during the specific number of variable displays, a message is displayed indicating that the high base state will end and be controlled to the low base state after the variable display ends (the "BATTLE RUSH End" display shown in FIG. 76(B)). At this time, the enlargement effect is not displayed for the "BATTLE RUSH End" display. In this way, it is possible to properly notify the player that the high base state will end without stirring up the player who is disappointed that the high base state will end, and further, it is possible to create a contrast between the display of "BATTLE RUSH Enters!!" in the ending performance. Then, when the game state is controlled to the low base state, a variable display (one to four variable displays of the second special pattern) is executed based on the reserved memory of the second special pattern that was stored at the time when the game state was controlled to the low base state.

In this embodiment, the first left hit display performance is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the variable display of the second special symbols in these low base states. As the first left hit display performance, as shown in Figures 76 (D) to 76 (F), in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, a first left hit display LH1 instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area 2L is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 over one to two frames without any animation or effects such as a moving display from outside the display area of the image display device 5. The first left hit display LH1 is composed of a left-facing arrow LY1 and the display of "left hit" within the left-facing arrow.

The leftward arrow LY1 is displayed as an animation that moves repeatedly toward the left of the image display device 5. Although not shown, a decorative effect is displayed on the surface of the display of "left hit" in the leftward arrow as an animation in which light moves repeatedly from "left" to "chi" in "left hit" over time. During the display period of the first left hit display LH1, the decorative effect SE9 in the shape of the leftward arrow LY1 is repeatedly displayed overlapping the moving display of the leftward arrow LY1, so that it is possible to clearly appeal to the player that the game state has been controlled to a low base state, that is, that the game state has been controlled to a game state in which the game ball is shot toward the left game area 2L. The first left hit display performance is a performance that is executed for a predetermined period (8 seconds) on the condition that the game state has been controlled from a high base state to a low base state. For example, even if one variable display in which the first left hit display performance is being executed ends and the next variable display starts, it is a performance that does not end until the predetermined period has passed. In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the first left-hit display performance is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable display of the second special pattern in the low base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the game state is controlled from the high base state to the low base state, if the second special pattern is not reserved and stored at the time the game state is controlled to the low base state, the first left-hit display performance is executed even in a situation in which the variable display of the first special pattern or the decorative pattern based on the variable display of the second special pattern is not being performed. In this case, a background display corresponding to the low base state is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first left-hit display performance is executed with the decorative pattern stopped on the background display. At this time, the first left-hit display performance is not interrupted even if the variable display is started.

(Second left-handed hit display)
In the low base state, even after the first left hit display performance, the second left hit display performance can be executed to instruct the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area 2L. For example, as shown in Fig. 77(A) to Fig. 77(D), when the player hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R in the low base state, when the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the second left hit display LH2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 for one to two frames without animation or effects such as a moving display from outside the display area of the image display device 5. The second left hit display LH2 is composed of a left-facing arrow LY2 and a display of "left hit" within the left-facing arrow.

The left-pointing arrow LY2 is displayed as an animation that moves repeatedly toward the left of the image display device 5. Although not shown, a decorative effect is displayed on the surface of the display of "left hit" within the left-pointing arrow as an animation in which light repeatedly moves from the "left" in "left hit" to the "chi" over time. During the display period of the second left-pointing display LH2, a decorative effect SE10 in the shape of the left-pointing arrow LY2 is repeatedly displayed overlapping the moving display of the left-pointing arrow LY2, so that the player can be more clearly instructed to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L. In other words, the display in the second left-pointing display performance has a common display pattern with the display in the first left-pointing display performance, except for the display position and display size in the display area of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, the second left-hit display effect is exemplified by displaying an arrow (left-pointing arrow LY2) smaller than the arrow (left-pointing arrow LY1) displayed as the first left-hit display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and arrows of the same size may be displayed in the first left-hit display effect and the second left-hit display effect. In addition, the second left-hit display effect may be executed until the gate switch 21 detects a predetermined number (five balls) of game balls shot by the player toward the right game area 2R in a low base state, and when the gate switch 21 detects that the predetermined number or more game balls have been shot, the second left-hit display effect may be interrupted and the first left-hit display effect may be executed.

(First prize ball count announcement)
In the jackpot game state or the high base state, a first prize ball number notification effect can be executed to update the total number of prize balls (first prize ball number) according to the entry of a game ball into the big prize opening during the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 78(A) to FIG. 78(E), the first prize ball number notification effect updates the value of the first prize ball number displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the upper left) of the display area of the image display device 5 every time a game ball enters the big prize opening in the jackpot game states of "Big Win A" to "Big Win D" (described later) (every time the CPU 120 for controlling the effect receives a big prize opening designation command). At this time, the display of the decoration effect SE11 is executed for the value of the digit whose value is updated. These decoration effects SE11 are displayed overlapping with the value of the digit whose value is updated, and the updated value can be recognized by the player when the display of the decoration effect SE11 is terminated.

(Second prize ball announcement)
In addition, in the jackpot game state, when the value of the total number of prize balls (first prize ball number) corresponding to the entry of game balls into the jackpot opening during the jackpot game of "jackpot C" or "jackpot D" described later reaches a specific value (for example, "10000" in the example shown in FIG. 78(F) and FIG. 78(G)), the second prize ball notification effect can be executed. As the second prize ball notification effect, as shown in FIG. 78(F) and FIG. 78(G), when the first prize ball number reaches a specific value, a specific value reaching image TO1 indicating that the specific value has been reached is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, a plurality of decorative effects SE12 for decorating the specific value reaching image TO1 are displayed around the specific value reaching image TO1. By displaying these decorative effects SE12 together with the specific value reaching image TO1, it is possible to clearly appeal to the player that the number of prize balls paid out has reached a specific number.

(Hold consecutive suggestion performance / Hold consecutive notification performance)
In a jackpot game state based on the variable display in the high base state, that is, in a jackpot game state based on the variable display of the second special pattern, it is possible to execute a reserved sequence suggestion effect which suggests that there is a reserved memory in the second special pattern reserved memory where the variable display result is a jackpot, in other words, a reserved sequence suggestion effect which suggests that a situation is present where a reserved sequence which will be controlled to the jackpot game state again will occur without the occurrence of a new starting winning, and a reserved sequence notification effect which notifies that there is a reserved memory in the second special pattern reserved memory where the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figs. 79(A) to 79(F) and 80(A) to 80(F), the reserved consecutive suggestion performance is first performed by displaying a message image MG2 (an image showing "GET V!" as shown in Fig. 79(B)) in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, which suggests that a reserved consecutive will occur. Next, in place of the message image MG2, an operation prompting image SS4 (an image of the push button 31B) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. After that, when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B begins, a decorative effect SE13 targeting the operation prompting image SS4 is displayed behind the operation prompting image SS4. In this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 79(C) to 79(E) and 80(C) to 80(E), an operation prompting image SS4 that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B and a light-emitting effect targeting the operation prompting image SS4 are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. More specifically, in the reserved consecutive suggestion performance, first, the display of the light-emitting effect is started, and the display of the operation prompting image SS4 is started during the display of the light-emitting effect. That is, it is executed in the same display pattern as when the operation prompting image SS2 in the deciding button performance is displayed. In addition, the type of sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R when the operation prompting image SS4 is displayed and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 are output and lit based on the control data common to when the operation prompting image SS2 in the deciding button performance is displayed. In addition, although not shown, during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an animation that repeatedly switches between a first display in which the push button 31B protrudes and a second display in which the push button 31B is recessed. At this time, a light-emitting effect, which is a kind of decorative effect that emits light with a first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that protrudes due to the first display, and a light-emitting effect, which is a kind of decorative effect that emits light with a second brightness higher than the first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that is recessed due to the second display. The animation of the operation prompt image SS4 is the same as the animation of the operation prompt image during the first line preview performance, second line preview performance, cut-in performance, and final button performance.

If there is a reserved memory in the second special symbol reserved memory whose variable display result is a jackpot, a reserved consecutive notification effect is executed in response to the player's operation of push button 31B or the end of the operation acceptance period of push button 31B. As the reserved consecutive notification effect, the letter "V" V2 is displayed in response to the presence of a reserved memory in the second special symbol reserved memory whose variable display result is a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in Figures 79(G) to 79(J), the letter "V" V2 is first displayed large across the entire display area of the image display device 5, and is gradually reduced in size toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, when the letter "V" V2 is reduced to a certain size, an enlargement effect KE19 is displayed with the letter "V" V2 as the target. Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effect KE19 with enlargement effects KE1, KE6, KE8, KE9, KE10, KE11, KE13, KE14, KE15, KE17, and KE18 in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, not only are the length of the display period and the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect different, but the speed at which the enlargement effect itself enlarges and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ. In this way, because the display period, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene being displayed even within the enlargement effect, the target image can be made to stand out effectively with a wide variety of enlargement effects.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory in the second special chart reserved memory that results in a jackpot, as shown in Figures 80 (G) and 80 (H), the brightness of the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily decreases in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B or the expiration of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and it is notified that there is no reserved memory in the second special chart reserved memory that results in a jackpot. After that, the display area of the image display device 5 returns to its original state and the jackpot game continues.

In addition, in the hold consecutive notification performance of this embodiment, if there is a hold memory in the second special chart hold memory where the variable display result is a jackpot, the letter "V" V2 is displayed in the same manner regardless of the number of hold memories in the second special chart hold memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display manner of the letter "V" V2 may be different depending on the number of hold memories in the second special chart hold memory where the variable display result is a jackpot.

(Demo performance)
In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, various effects can be executed during variable display in the jackpot game state, low base state, and high base state, but when no game is being played, a demo movie can be displayed as a demo effect on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 81 (A) and (B), when the start conditions for the demo movie display (demonstration performance) are met, the display of the first scene starts. Note that, as described later, depending on the start conditions, a switching display may be displayed before the display of the first scene starts. In the first scene, a company name background display 003SG301 consisting of white characters is displayed, and a company name display 003SG302 consisting mainly of a blue company slogan display 003SG302A and a company logo display 003SG302B is displayed in a "small" size at the center of the screen, and then faded in while gradually expanding and decreasing the transmittance (transparency), so that the company name display 003SG302 appears to be moving from the back side of the display screen to the front side. Note that the display area 5S at the upper left of the display screen maintains the number of reserved memories and small symbols. In this way, even if the decorative symbols are not displayed, the small symbols are displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

In addition, in the first scene, the game effect lamp 9 changes its light emission mode (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 003SG302. For example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 may increase or the color may change as the transmittance of the company name display 003SG302 decreases.

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 1" part of the second scene begins to be displayed, the friendly characters 003SG500A-003SG500D that appear in the various effects and the text displays 003SG501A-003SG501D showing the names of each character are faded in (animated) in sequence, while decorative effects SE21 corresponding to these friendly characters 003SG500A-003SG500D are displayed in the background (see Figures 81 (C)-(F)). Note that in the "Machine Introduction 1" part, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that is not linked to the text (text displays 003SG501A-003SG501D) displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-1" part of the second scene begins to be displayed, an animation of the enemy character 003SG510A that appears in various effects is displayed, and a fade-in (animated) text display 003SG511A reads "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" (see Figures 81 (G) and (H)). Next, when the "Model Introduction 3-1" part begins to be displayed, a background display 003SG503 showing the city and an ally character 003SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display is displayed showing the ally character flying through the city to rush to the scene (see Figure 81 (I)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-2" part of the second scene starts to be displayed again, the ally character 003SG500A, the enemy character 003SG510A, and the text display 003SG511B saying "Protect the town from the enemy!" are faded in (animated) (see Figures 81(J) and (K)). When the "Model Introduction 3-2" display starts after that, the ally character 003SG500A is enlarged and a cut-in and a decorative effect SE21, which is the same effect as the effect displayed in Figures 81(C) to 81(F), are displayed as an effect corresponding to the cut-in (see Figure 81(L)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-3" part of the second scene starts to be displayed again, an image of friendly character 003SG500A and enemy character 003SG510A fighting and text display 003SG511C saying "Don't lose!" are faded in (animated) (see FIG. 82 (M)-(N)). After that, all friendly characters 003SG500A-003SG500D and text display 003SG511D saying "Everyone unite!" are faded in (animated) (see FIG. 82 (O)).

Note that the animation display of the friendly characters 003SG500A-003SG500D and enemy character 003SG510A in the second scene involves the friendly characters expanding and contracting and fighting, while the various text displays 003SG501A-003SG501D and 003SG511A-003SG511D are animated with less change in visibility than the animation displays involving movement such as the friendly characters 003SG500A-003SG500D, for example by fading in at the start of the display.

In addition, in the second scene, the game effect lamp 9 flashes green when "Machine Introduction 3-1" or "Machine Introduction 3-2" is displayed, but it is basically lit in a white wave pattern, and the light emission mode (e.g., lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or never) changes in conjunction with the animation display (fade-in display) of the various text displays 003SG501A-003SG501D, 003SG511A-003SG511D. Basically, the light emission mode (e.g., lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes in conjunction with the dynamic animation display of friendly characters 003SG500A-003SG500D and enemy character 003SG510A running, jumping, punching, etc. In other words, in the second scene, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that is not linked to the animation display of the text.

Next, when the display of the third scene begins, a decorative effect SE21 is displayed in the background, and the model main title name display 003SG520A, consisting of the letters "FEVER POWER" and a cloud-shaped background, is displayed in "small" size in the center position (prescribed display position) of the display screen, and then fades in (animated display) while gradually expanding and decreasing its transmittance (transparency), making it appear as if the model main title name display 003SG520A is moving from the back of the display screen to the front (see Figures 82 (P) to (R)). At this time, multiple roughly cross-shaped decorative effects SE22 are displayed around the model main title name display 003SG520A.

Next, a c consisting of the letter "II" is displayed to the right of the model main title name display 003SG520A (prescribed display position), and then fades in while shrinking slightly and decreasing the transmittance (transparency) (see Figures 82 (S) to (T)). At the completion of the fade-in display of the model subtitle name display 003SG520B, an enlargement effect KE21 is displayed targeting the model main title name display 003SG520A and the model subtitle name display 003SG520B. When comparing the enlargement effect KE21 with the enlargement effects KE1, KE6, KE8, KE9, KE10, KE11, KE13, KE14, KE15, KE17, KE18, and KE19 in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, the length of the display period and the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transmittance increases are also different. In this way, the display period, enlargement speed, and transparency speed of the enlargement effect vary depending on the scene being displayed, making it possible to effectively highlight the target image using a wide variety of enlargement effects.

In addition, the model subtitle name display 003SG520C, which consists of the characters "Everyone Assemble Ver.", is displayed in the center (default display position) in front of the model main title name display 003SG520A, and then moves slightly smaller and is displayed below "FEVER POWER" (default display position) (see Figures 82 (U) to (V)).

When the movement of the model subtitle name display 003SG520C is completed, the model main title name display 003SG520A, model subtitle name display 003SG520B, and model subtitle name display 003SG520C are displayed together in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, multiple roughly cross-shaped decorative effects SE22 are displayed around the model main title name display 003SG520A, model subtitle name display 003SG520B, and model subtitle name display 003SG520C, with the model main title name display 003SG520A, model subtitle name display 003SG520B, and model subtitle name display 003SG520C as the target.

Also, in the third scene, the game effect lamp 9 is basically lit in a rainbow wave pattern, and the light emission pattern changes in conjunction with the animation display of the model subtitle name displays 003SG520C, 003SG520C. In particular, in the "model subtitle name" part, when the model subtitle name displays 003SG520C, 003SG520C are moved and displayed in the specified display position, the game effect lamp 9 flashes. In other words, in the second scene, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that is not linked to the animation display of the characters.

Next, when the display of the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene begins, a dark green caution background display 003SG311 is displayed, and the addiction prevention display 003SG312 is faded in (animated) in the center of the screen (see FIG. 82 (W)). Next, when the display of the "Caution 2" part begins, the display is switched to a black caution background display 003SG321, and the accident prevention display 003SG322 is displayed (see FIG. 82 (X)). Note that no decorative effects or enlargement effects are displayed for the addiction prevention display 003SG312 and the accident prevention display 003SG322.

The game effect lamp 9 does not flash white in conjunction with the fade-in display of the addiction prevention display 003SG312 in the "Caution 1" and "Caution 2" parts, and continues to light up in a white wave pattern in the fourth scene.

In addition, in the fourth scene, the game effect lamp 9 does not change its light emission mode (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the addiction prevention display 003SG312, for example, so that the addiction prevention display 003SG312 is prevented from being displayed more emphasized than the company name display 003SG302, the model main title name display 003SG520A, and the model subtitle name displays 003SG520C, 003SG520C. In other words, in the second scene, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that is not linked to the animation display of characters.

As shown in FIG. 87(A), the demo performance in this embodiment is a performance in which the model main title name display 003SG520A and the enlargement effect KE21 targeted at the model main title name display 003SG520A are enlarged and displayed so as to diffuse from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the outside of the display area. The enlargement effect KE21 in the demo performance is displayed overlapping the display area 5S in the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 during the enlargement process. As described above, the number of types of decorative effects displayed during the demonstration performance is two, decorative effect SE21 and decorative effect SE22, and the number of types of enlargement effects displayed during the demonstration performance is one, enlargement effect KE21.

(Effects for each production)
As described above, in this embodiment, the enlargement effect in each performance is displayed as an image imitating a different image, as shown in Figures 85 and 86. That is, the enlargement effects in this embodiment are all images with different shapes for each performance. The enlargement effect is also an image with a higher transmittance than the target image. As shown in Figure 99, in this embodiment, the enlargement effect is an image that has a different shape from the target image, with some exceptions, and does not change in size over time. The decorative effect is also an image with the same transmittance as the target image.

(Timing chart for each performance)
Next, the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of the variable display, the first line preview effect, the second line preview effect, the pseudo consecutive effect, the normal reach effect, the strong super reach title effect, the pattern matching effect, the preview button effect, and the deciding button effect will be explained based on the timing charts shown in Figures 109 to 121.

(Enlarged decorative pattern when variable display starts)
First, as shown in Figures 109, 118, and 121, in the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement performance, the decorative pattern is changed from the normal size "medium" to a larger "large" state over a period A1 from the start timing of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement performance, which is the start timing of the variable display, to the end timing of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement performance, and then the decorative pattern is maintained in the "large" state for a predetermined period, and then the decorative pattern is reduced from the "large" state to the "medium" state again. In other words, the period A1 from the start timing to the end timing of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement performance is the enlarged display period of the decorative pattern in the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement performance.

In addition, during the period A1 during which the decorative pattern is maintained in the "large" state, the image display device 5 displays a decorative effect targeting the decorative pattern over the period A2. Furthermore, from the timing at which the decorative effect starts to be displayed, the speakers 8L and 8R play a decorative effect-compatible sound corresponding to the decorative effect over the period A3. In other words, the period A2 is the display period for the decorative effect in the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of the variable display, and the period A3 is the output period for the decorative effect-compatible sound in the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of the variable display.

Here, in the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of variable display in this embodiment, period A1 is set to be longer than periods A2 and A3, and period A2 is set to be longer than period A3 (A1>A2, A1>A3, A2>A3). In other words, in the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of variable display, during the period in which the decorative pattern is enlarged, the display of the decorative effect targeted at the decorative pattern and the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound are started, and during the period in which the decorative pattern is enlarged, the display of the decorative effect targeted at the decorative pattern and the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound are ended. Furthermore, while the display of the decorative effect targeted at the decorative pattern and the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound are executed from the same timing, the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound is ended earlier than the display of the decorative effect.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period A2 from period A1 is set to a period longer than period A2. In other words, in the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of variable display, the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping with each other.

In this embodiment, the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of the variable display is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of the variable display may be set to be shorter than the period during which the decorative pattern and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping each other, than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the performance background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 during the period A41 from the start of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement performance to the start of the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound, and then, during the period A42 until the end of the display of the decorative effect, light emission control is performed based on the light emission control data for the first effect display corresponding to the decorative effect (first effect) in the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement performance. Then, light emission control is again performed based on the performance background fermentation industry data during the period 43 until the end of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement performance.

(First line preview)
As shown in Figures 110, 118, and 121, in the first line preview performance, a first line image according to the performance pattern of the first line preview performance is displayed over a period B1 from the start timing of the first line preview performance to the end timing of the first line preview performance. In other words, the period B1 from the start timing of the first line preview performance to the end timing of the first line preview performance is the display period of the first line image in the first line preview performance. Note that the first line image in this embodiment is an image that is displayed and moved from the upper end to the center of the image display device 5 from the start timing of the first line preview performance.

From the timing when the movement of the first dialogue image is completed, an enlargement effect is displayed for the first dialogue image over a period B2, a first dialogue corresponding sound corresponding to the first dialogue image is output over a period B3, and an enlargement effect corresponding sound is output over a period B4. In other words, period B2 is the display period of the enlargement effect in the first dialogue preview performance, period B3 is the output period of the first dialogue corresponding sound in the first dialogue preview performance, and period B4 is the output period of the enlargement effect corresponding sound in the first dialogue preview performance.

Here, in the first line preview performance in this embodiment, period B1 is set to be longer than periods B2, B3, and B4, and period B3 is set to be longer than periods B2 and B4 (B1>B2, B1>B3, B1>B4, B3>B2, B3>B4).

In other words, in the first line preview performance, the display of the enlargement effect and the output of the first line corresponding sound and the enlargement effect corresponding sound begin from the timing when the movement of the first line image is completed. Of these, the display of the enlargement effect, the output of the first line corresponding sound, and the output of the enlargement effect corresponding sound, the display of the enlargement effect ends first, and the output of the first line corresponding sound ends last.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period B2 from period B1 is set to a period longer than period B2. In other words, in the first dialogue preview performance, the period during which the first dialogue image is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the first dialogue image is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the first dialogue image and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping each other is set to be longer than the period during which the first dialogue image is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect in the first dialogue preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the first dialogue image and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping each other in the first dialogue preview performance may be set to be shorter than the period during which the first dialogue image and the decorative effect are displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect in the first dialogue preview performance.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the performance background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 during the period B51 from the start timing of the first line preview performance to the completion timing of the movement of the first line image, and then, during the period B52, which is the same period as the display period of the enlargement effect (period B2), light emission control is performed based on the enlargement effect display light emission control data A corresponding to the enlargement effect for the first line preview performance. Then, during the period B53 until the end timing of the first line preview performance, light emission control is performed based on the light emission control data for the first line preview performance corresponding to the first line preview performance after the display of the enlargement effect has ended.

(Second line preview)
111, 118, and 121, in the second line preview performance, the character image is moved from the left end to the center of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period from the start timing of the second line preview performance. Then, from the completion timing of the character image movement display, a second line image according to the performance pattern of the second line preview performance is displayed for a period C1 until the end timing of the second line preview performance. In other words, the period C1 from the completion timing of the character image movement to the end timing of the second line preview performance is the display period of the line image in the second line preview performance.

In addition, from the timing when the movement of the character image is completed, a decorative effect is displayed for a period C2 targeting the second dialogue image, and a decorative effect corresponding sound and a second dialogue corresponding sound corresponding to the first dialogue image are output for a period C3. In other words, period C2 is the display period of the decorative effect in the second dialogue preview performance, and period C3 is the output period of the decorative effect corresponding sound and the second dialogue corresponding sound in the second dialogue preview performance.

Here, in the second dialogue preview performance in this embodiment, period C1 is set to be longer than periods C2 and C3, and period C2 is set to be longer than period C3 (C1>C2, C1>C3, C2>C3).

In other words, in the second dialogue preview performance, the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect-compatible sound and the second dialogue-compatible sound begin at the same time as the display of the second dialogue image begins, and during the display period of the second dialogue image, the output of the decorative effect-compatible sound and the second dialogue-compatible sound ends before the display of the decorative effect.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the performance background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 during the period C41 from the start of the second line preview performance to the completion of the character image movement. Furthermore, in the period C42 from the completion of the character image movement to just before the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound and the B second line corresponding sound ends, light emission is controlled based on the light emission control data A for the second effect display corresponding to the decorative effect (second effect) targeted at the second line image. Then, thereafter, light emission is controlled based on the light emission control data for the performance background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 during the period C43 until the end of the second line preview performance.

(Pseudo consecutive performance)
As shown in FIG. 112, FIG. 119, and FIG. 121, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C for a period D1 from the start timing of the pseudo consecutive performance to the end timing of the pseudo consecutive performance. More specifically, for a certain period from the start timing of the pseudo consecutive performance, the image display device 5 executes a slow variable display of the pseudo consecutive pattern (variable display at a slower speed than the variable display of the normal decorative pattern), and the player is suggested to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive pattern. Then, when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, after a pseudo consecutive pattern enlargement display period in which the pseudo consecutive pattern is changed from the normal size "medium" state to a "large" state larger than the "medium" state from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive pattern, the pseudo consecutive pattern is maintained in the "large" state for a predetermined period, and then the pseudo consecutive pattern is reduced from the "large" state to the "medium" state again in the pseudo consecutive pattern reduction display period. Thereafter, the size of the pseudo consecutive symbols is maintained at "medium" until the pseudo consecutive performance ends.

In other words, the period D1 from the start timing to the end timing of the pseudo consecutive performance is the display period of the pseudo consecutive pattern in the pseudo consecutive performance.

In addition, a decorative effect targeting the pseudo-consecutive patterns is displayed over a period D2 from the variable display speed low speed period to the timing of the provisional stop of the pseudo-consecutive patterns. Furthermore, an enlarged effect targeting the pseudo-consecutive patterns is displayed during a period D3 from the provisional stop of the pseudo-consecutive patterns to the timing immediately after the end of the enlarged pseudo-consecutive pattern display period, and during a period D4 from the start of the reduced pseudo-consecutive pattern display period to the timing immediately after the end of the reduced pseudo-consecutive pattern display period.

Then, a decorative effect-compatible sound is output over period D5, which is the same period as period D2, and an enlargement effect-compatible sound is output over period D6 from the timing when the enlarged pseudo consecutive pattern display starts and period D7 from the timing when the reduced pseudo consecutive pattern display starts. In other words, period D2 is the display period of the decorative effect in the pseudo consecutive performance, periods D3 and D4 are the display periods of the enlargement effect in the pseudo consecutive performance, period D5 is the output period of the decorative effect-compatible sound in the pseudo consecutive performance, and periods D6 and D7 are the output periods of the enlargement effect-compatible sound.

Here, in the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment, period D1 is set to be longer than periods D2 to D7, and periods D2 and D5, periods D3 and D4, and periods 6 and D7 are each set to be the same length. Period D6 is set to be longer than period D3, and period D7 is set to be longer than period D4 (D1>D2, D1>D3, D1>D4, D1>CD, D1>C6, D1>CD7, D3=D4, D6=D7, D6>D3, D7>D4).

In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound start at the same time, and the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound end at the same time. Also, while the display of the enlargement effect corresponding to the enlarged display of the pseudo consecutive pattern and the output of the enlargement effect corresponding sound start at the same time, the display of the enlargement effect corresponding to the enlarged display of the pseudo consecutive pattern ends earlier than the output of the enlargement effect corresponding sound. And, while the display of the enlargement effect corresponding to the reduced display of the pseudo consecutive pattern and the output of the enlargement effect corresponding sound start at the same time, the display of the enlargement effect corresponding to the reduced display of the pseudo consecutive pattern ends earlier than the output of the enlargement effect corresponding sound.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period D2 from period D1 is set to a period longer than period D2, the period obtained by subtracting period D3 from period D1 is set to a period longer than period D3, and the period obtained by subtracting period D4 from period D1 is set to a period longer than period D4. In other words, in the pseudo-consecutive performance, the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping, and the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect is set to be longer than the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns and the enlargement effect are displayed overlapping.

The period D2 is set to be longer than the periods D3 and D4. In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the period during which the pseudo consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the pseudo consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when the pseudo consecutive patterns are enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when the pseudo consecutive patterns are reduced.

In this embodiment, the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the decorative effect may be set to be shorter than the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the effect background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 during the period D81 from the start of the pseudo consecutive performance to the start of the display of the decorative effect, and is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for pseudo consecutive pattern temporary stop inducing in response to inducing the player to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive pattern during the period D82 from the start of the display of the decorative effect to the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive pattern. Then, during the period D83 from the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive pattern to the end of the reduced pseudo consecutive pattern display, light emission control is performed based on the light emission control data for pseudo consecutive pattern temporary stop success corresponding to the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive pattern, and during the period D84 from the end of the reduced pseudo consecutive pattern display to the end of the pseudo consecutive performance, light emission control is performed based on the light emission control data for the effect background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

(Normal reach effect)
As shown in Figures 113, 119, and 121, in the normal reach performance, the left and right decorative patterns are enlarged and reduced over a period E1 from the start timing of the normal reach performance (the timing when the decorative patterns (left and right decorative patterns) stop in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R) to the end timing of the normal reach performance (the timing when the decorative patterns (left and right decorative patterns) stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R start to move left and right in the display area of the image display device 5). More specifically, after a decorative pattern enlargement display period in which the stopped left and right decorative patterns are changed from a "medium" state, which is the normal size, to a "large" state larger than the "medium", the left and right decorative patterns are maintained in the "large" state for a predetermined period, and then the left and right decorative patterns are reduced again from the "large" state to the "medium" state during the decorative pattern reduction display period. From then on, the size of the decorative patterns on the left and right will be maintained at "medium" until the end of the normal reach performance.

In other words, the period E1 from the start of the normal reach performance to the end of the normal reach performance is the display period for the left and right decorative symbols in the normal reach performance, and the period E11 from the start of the normal reach performance to the end of the reduced display period for the left and right decorative symbols is the enlarged display period for the left and right decorative symbols in the normal reach performance.

In addition, an enlargement effect is displayed for the left and right decorative symbols over a period E2 from the start of the normal reach performance to a specific timing within period E11, and an enlargement effect corresponding sound is output over a period E3 from the start of the normal reach performance to the start of the reduced display period of the left and right decorative symbols. In other words, period E2 is the display period of the enlargement effect for the left and right decorative symbols in the normal reach performance, and period E3 is the output period of the enlargement effect corresponding sound in the normal reach performance.

Here, in the normal reach presentation in this embodiment, period E1 is set to be longer than periods E11, E2, and E3, and period E11 is set to be longer than periods E2 and E3. Also, period E3 is set to be longer than period E2 (E1>E11, E1>E2, E1>E3, E11>E2, E11>E3, E3>E2).

In other words, in a normal reach performance, the display of the enlarged effect and the output of the sound corresponding to the enlarged effect begin at the same time as the enlarged display of the decorative patterns on the left and right. However, of these, the display of the enlarged effect ends first, and the enlarged display of the decorative patterns ends last.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period E2 from period E1 is set to a period longer than period E2. In other words, in the normal reach performance, the period during which the decorative pattern and the enlargement effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect.

In this embodiment, in the normal reach performance, the period during which the decorative pattern and the enlargement effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the normal reach performance, the period during which the decorative pattern and the enlargement effect are displayed overlapping may be set to be shorter than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the enlargement effect display light emission control data B corresponding to the display of the enlargement effect in the normal reach performance over a period E41 from the start of the normal reach performance to a specific timing when the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the display of the enlargement effect, and the output of the sound corresponding to the enlargement effect are all being executed, and thereafter, the light emission control is executed based on the performance background light emission control data corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 over a period E42 until the end of the normal reach performance.

(Strong Super Reach Title Production)
As shown in Figures 114, 115, 120, and 121, in the strong super reach title effect, during the period F1 from the start of the strong super reach title effect to the end of the super reach title effect, the title image (reach title image) of the strong super reach effect is enlarged. Specifically, from the start of the strong super reach title effect to the period F11, the reach title image (white or red strong super reach title image) is displayed in a "small" state, which is smaller than the "medium" normal size of the decorative pattern, and then is changed to a "large" state, which is larger than the "medium" normal size of the decorative pattern, after an enlarged display period (reach title image enlarged display period). Then, from then on, the reach title image is maintained in the "large" state until the end of the strong super reach title effect.

In other words, the period F1 from the start of the strong super reach title performance to the end of the strong super reach title performance is the display period of the reach title image in the strong super reach title performance, and the period F11 from the start of the strong super reach title performance to the end of the reach title image enlargement display period is the period from the start of the reach title image display in the strong super reach title performance to the completion of the enlargement.

In addition, in the strong super reach title performance, an enlargement effect targeting the reach title image is displayed over period F2 during the display period when the reach title image is in the "large" state, an enlargement effect corresponding to the display color (white or red) of the reach title image is displayed over period F3 from the end of the reach title image enlargement display period, a strong reach title corresponding sound corresponding to the strong reach title image displayed during the decorative effect display period and from the timing after the display of the enlargement effect ends over period F4 is output, and an enlargement effect corresponding sound corresponding to the enlargement effect is output over period F5 from the end of the reach title image enlargement display period to the start of the output of the strong reach title corresponding sound.

In other words, period F2 is the display period of the decorative effect in the strong super reach title performance, period F3 is the display period of the enlarged effect in the strong super reach title performance, period F4 is the output period of the strong reach title corresponding sound in the strong super reach title performance, and period F5 is the output period of the enlarged effect corresponding sound in the strong super reach title performance.

Here, in the Strong Super Reach title performance in this embodiment, period F1 is set to be longer than period F11 and periods F2 to F5, and period F5 is set to be longer than period F3. In other words, in the Strong Super Reach title performance, the display of the enlargement effect and the output of the enlargement effect-compatible sound start at the same time, while the display of the enlargement effect ends earlier than the enlargement effect-compatible sound.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period F2 from period F1 is set to a period longer than period F2, and the period obtained by subtracting period F3 from period F1 is set to a period longer than period F3. In other words, in the strong super reach title performance, the period during which the reach title image is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the reach title image and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping, and the period during which the reach title image is displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect is set to be longer than the period during which the reach title image and the enlargement effect are displayed overlapping.

The period F2 is set to be longer than the period F3. In other words, in the strong super reach title performance, the period during which the reach title image is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the reach title image is displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect.

In this embodiment, the period during which the reach title image is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the pseudo consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the pseudo consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the decorative effect may be set to be shorter than the period during which the pseudo consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo consecutive patterns are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the strong reach title effect corresponding to the color of the displayed reach title image during period F61, which is the same length as period F11 from the start timing of the strong reach title effect, and is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data C for the enlargement effect display corresponding to the enlargement effect in the strong super reach title effect during period F62 from the end timing of period F11 (the end timing of the enlarged display period of the reach title image) to the timing during which the decorative effect is displayed, the enlargement effect is displayed, and the enlargement effect corresponding sound is output. Thereafter, the light emission control is controlled based on the light emission control data for the strong reach title effect corresponding to the color of the displayed reach title during period F63 until the end timing of the strong super reach title effect.

(Pattern matching effect)
As shown in FIG. 116, FIG. 120, and FIG. 121, in the pattern matching performance, during the period G1 from the start timing of the pattern matching performance to the end timing of the pattern matching performance, each decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed. Specifically, from the start timing of the pattern matching performance to the period G11, the size of each decorative pattern is displayed in a "small" state, which is smaller than the normal decorative pattern size of "medium", and then, through the enlarged display period (decorative pattern enlarged display period), each decorative pattern is changed to a "large" state, which is larger than the normal decorative pattern size of "medium". Then, after displaying each decorative pattern in the "large" state for a certain period of time, each decorative pattern is changed from the "large" state to the "medium" state through the reduced display period (decorative pattern display period). Note that, from the end timing of the period G11 to the end timing of the pattern matching performance, each decorative pattern is maintained in the "medium" state.

In other words, the period G1 from the start of the pattern matching performance to the end of the pattern matching performance is the display period of the decorative patterns in the pattern matching performance, and the period G11 from the start of the pattern matching performance to the end of the decorative pattern reduction display period is the enlarged/reduced display period of the decorative patterns in the pattern matching performance.

In addition, in the pattern matching performance, a decorative effect corresponding to each decorative pattern is displayed over a period G2 from the start of the pattern matching performance to the start of the reduced decorative pattern display period, an enlargement effect corresponding to each decorative pattern is displayed over a period G3 from the end of the reduced decorative pattern display period, a sound corresponding to the decorative effect is output over a period G4 from the start of the pattern matching performance to the start of the enlarged decorative pattern display period, an enlargement effect sound is output over a period G5 from the end of the reduced decorative pattern display period, and a pattern size change sound is output in response to the change in size of each decorative pattern to "large" (enlargement) over a period G6 from the end of the enlarged decorative pattern display period.

In other words, period G2 is the display period of the decorative effect in the pattern matching performance, period G3 is the display period of the enlargement effect in the pattern matching performance, period G4 is the output period of the decorative effect corresponding sound in the pattern matching performance, period G5 is the output period of the enlargement effect corresponding sound in the pattern matching performance, and period G6 is the output period of the sound corresponding to the change in pattern size when enlarged in the pattern matching performance.

Here, in the pattern matching performance in this embodiment, period G1 is set to be longer than period G11 and periods G2 to G6. Furthermore, period G2 is set to be longer than period G4, and period G5 is set to be longer than period G3 (G1>G11, G1>G2, G1>G3, G1>G4, G1>G5, G1>G6, G2>G4, G5>G3). In other words, in the pattern matching performance, the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound are started at the same timing, while the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound ends earlier than the display of the decorative effect, and the display of the enlargement effect and the output of the enlargement effect corresponding sound are started at the same timing, while the display of the enlargement effect ends earlier than the output of the enlargement effect corresponding sound.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period G2 from period G1 is set to a period longer than period G2, and the period obtained by subtracting period G3 from period G1 is set to a period longer than period G3. In other words, in the pattern matching performance, the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping, and the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the magnifying effect is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern and the magnifying effect are displayed overlapping.

The period G2 is set to be longer than the period G3. In other words, in the pattern matching performance, the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the magnification effect.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect in the pattern matching performance is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the magnifying effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect in the pattern matching performance may be set to be shorter than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the magnifying effect.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data B for displaying the decorative effect in the pattern matching performance during the period G71 from the start of the pattern matching performance to the period during which each decorative pattern is maintained in the "large" state, and is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the pattern matching performance corresponding to the pattern matching performance during the period 72 from the end of the period G71 to the end of the period G11, and is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data D for displaying the enlargement effect corresponding to the enlargement effect in the pattern matching performance during the period G73 from the end of the period G11 to the display period of the enlargement effect and the output period of the sound corresponding to the enlargement effect, and thereafter, is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the pattern matching performance corresponding to the pattern matching performance until the end of the pattern matching performance.

(Preview button effect)
117(A), 120, and 121, in the advance notice button performance, a light emitting effect is displayed as a decorative effect over a period X1 from the start timing of the advance notice button performance, and an operation prompting image is displayed during the period X1. After the operation prompting image is displayed (after the end of the appearance display period shown in FIG. 117(A)), the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B also occurs during the period X1.

(Decisive button effect)
117(B), 120, and 121, in the deciding button performance, a light emitting effect is displayed as a decorative effect over a period Y1 from the start timing of the deciding button performance, and the display of an operation prompting image is started during the period Y1. After the display of the operation prompting image is completed (after the end of the appearance display period shown in FIG. 117(B)), the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B also begins during the period Y1.

Here, for the preview button effect and the deciding button effect in this embodiment, the period Y1 is set to be longer than the period X1.

Although not shown in FIG. 121 above, when the pattern stop expansion performance is being performed, the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping decorative effects is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed with overlapping decorative effects.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 113 and Fig. 116, when the normal reach performance is executed, the light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 is executed by the light emission control data B for enlargement effect display corresponding to the display of the enlargement effect targeted at the decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the normal reach performance is executed, the light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed by the light emission control data not corresponding to the enlargement effect targeted at the decorative symbol (for example, as shown in Fig. 129, during the entire execution period of the normal reach performance, the light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 is executed by the light emission control data for the practice background). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations about being controlled to a jackpot game state in a situation where it is still unknown whether the game will develop into a super reach performance.

(Variation 2)
In the second left-hit display performance in the above embodiment, the decorative effect SE9 targeted at the left-pointing arrow LY1 is displayed as the decorative effect SE10 of the same form as the decorative effect SE9 targeted at the left-pointing arrow LY2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Fig. 130, in the second left-hit display performance, after the left-pointing arrow LY2 appears and is displayed without any effect, the decorative effect SE14 targeted at the left-pointing arrow LY2 may be displayed as different from the decorative effect SE9 targeted at the left-pointing arrow LY1. In this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to know which of the left-pointing arrow LY1 and the left-pointing arrow LY2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

(Variation 3)
In addition, in the pattern matching performance in the above embodiment, the decorative effect SE6 is displayed as the appearance effect in the present invention for the decorative pattern that is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect that emphasizes the enlargement of the decorative pattern (for example, a wind effect that spreads from the center to the edge of the image display device 5) may be displayed in addition to the decorative effect SE6 for the decorative pattern that is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, the display of the effect that emphasizes the enlargement of the decorative pattern may be executed in both the pattern matching performance when the game is controlled from the low base state to the big win game state and the pattern matching performance when the game is controlled from the high base state to the big win game state, or may be executed only in the pattern matching performance when the game is controlled from the low base state to the big win game state, in which the variable display time of the special pattern is relatively long.

(Variation 4)
In addition, in the pattern matching performance in the above embodiment, the display area of the image display device 5 is exemplified as a form in which the enlargement effect KE12 is displayed as the stay effect in the present invention, targeting the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the stay effect in the present invention, in addition to the enlargement effect KE12, an effect emphasizing the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination (for example, an effect in which light is reflected on each decorative pattern) may be displayed. Furthermore, the display of the effect emphasizing the enlargement of the decorative pattern may be executed in both the pattern matching performance when the game is controlled from the low base state to the jackpot game state and the pattern matching performance when the game is controlled from the high base state to the jackpot game state, or may be executed only in the pattern matching performance when the game is controlled from the low base state to the jackpot game state, in which the variable display time of the special pattern is relatively long.

(Variation 5)
In addition, as an example of the pattern matching presentation in the above embodiment, a form in which a common decorative effect SE6 is displayed when the game state is in a low base state and when the game state is in a high base state has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different types of decorative effects may be displayed for the pattern matching presentation in the low base state and the pattern matching presentation in the high base state.

(Variation 6)
In addition, in the above embodiment, various effects during variable display (effects corresponding to the predetermined effects of the present invention, such as enlarged decorative symbols at the start of variable display, dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, reach suggestion effects, normal reach effects, weak super reach title effects, development effects, strong super reach title effects, cut-in effects, and symbol alignment effects) and demo effects (demo movies, which are the demonstration effects of the present invention) in a state in which variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory of special symbols in a low base state or a high base state are performed by applying enlargement effects and decorations to characters and letters, which are the objects of the present invention. Although the embodiment of displaying the effect has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. In the predetermined performance, a first object such as a specific character or letter and a first effect targeting the first object can be displayed, and in the demonstration performance, a second object such as a character or letter different from the predetermined performance and a second effect targeting the second object can be displayed. During the execution period of the predetermined performance, the second object and the second effect cannot be displayed, while during the execution of the demonstration performance, the first object and the first effect can be displayed. For example, after the scene of FIG. 82(O) in the demonstration performance is executed and before the scene of FIG. 82(P) is executed, the display of the "performance introduction" part that introduces some of the performances that can be executed during the variable display is started. In the "performance introduction" part, the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B that are the display of the first dialogue preview performance, the enlarged effect KE1, and the image KG2 and the enlarged effect KE11 that are the display of the cut-in performance are displayed together with the display of "DEMO". That is, during variable display, it is possible to display the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B which are the display of the first dialogue preview performance, the enlargement effect KE1 and the image KG2 which is the display of the cut-in performance, and the enlargement effect KE11, while it is possible to display the model main title name display 003SG520A, the model subtitle name display 003SG520B, the model subtitle name display 003SG520C, the enlargement effect KE21, and the decoration effect SE22 in the demonstration performance shown in Figures 82 (P) to 82 (V). In the demonstration performance, it is possible to display dialogue images CG1A, CG1B which display the first dialogue preview performance, an enlargement effect KE1 and an image KG2 which displays a cut-in performance, and an enlargement effect KE11, and it is also possible to display a model main title name display 003SG520A, a model subtitle name display 003SG520B, a model subtitle name display 003SG520C, an enlargement effect KE21, and a decorative effect SE22 in the demonstration performance.

(Variation 7)
In the above embodiment, the jackpot type when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot is exemplified as a jackpot type C in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the probability variable control and the time-saving control are both executed a maximum of 100 times in the high base state after the jackpot game is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot may be a jackpot type (in this modified example 7, the jackpot D shown in FIG. 131) in which the number of rounds, the presence or absence of the probability variable control and the time-saving control in the high base state after the jackpot game is finished, or the maximum number of executions. In addition, in this way, when the jackpot C and the jackpot D are provided as the jackpot type when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the number of types of effects displayed in the performance executed during the jackpot game of the jackpot D may be greater than the number of types of the total number of effects displayed during the demo performance (demo movie). Furthermore, the presentation executed during the jackpot game of jackpot D is as shown in Figures 70, 75, 78, 79, and 80.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot game state in which game balls can enter the jackpot winning port and more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the starting winning port or the general winning port 10 is considered to be an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state) may also be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the winning port than in a normal state or making it easier to be controlled into a jackpot game state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. A gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may also be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of displaying performance identification information that is variably displayed ;
A performance control means capable of executing a plurality of types of preview performances that predict the possibility of the advantageous state being attained, and capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including objects on the display means in accordance with the preview performances ;
The performance control means includes:
After the variable display of the performance identification information is started, a first preview performance can be executed in a first situation before the performance identification information becomes a reach state;
After the variable display of the performance identification information is started, a second notice performance can be executed in a second situation after the performance identification information becomes a reach state;
The display means is
An object corresponding to a line of a character displayed in the first preview performance can be displayed,
The effect corresponding to the object in the first preview performance can be enlarged and displayed,
An object corresponding to the type of reach established in the second preview performance can be displayed,
The effect corresponding to the object in the second preview performance can be enlarged and displayed,
a period during which the object in the first preview performance and the effect corresponding to the object in the first preview performance are displayed without being superimposed is longer than a period during which the object in the first preview performance and the effect corresponding to the object in the first preview performance are displayed superimposed on each other;
a period during which the object in the second preview performance and the effect corresponding to the object in the second preview performance are displayed without being superimposed is longer than a period during which the object in the second preview performance and the effect corresponding to the object in the second preview performance are displayed superimposed on each other;
The effect corresponding to the object in the first preview performance is hidden before being enlarged and superimposed on the display area of the launch instruction object that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
In a gaming machine, an effect corresponding to an object in the second preview performance is displayed during a first period of the display period so as not to be superimposed on the display area of the launch instruction object, and during a second period after the first period has elapsed, is displayed so as to be enlarged and superimposed on the display area of the launch instruction object.

Images